Terex General-Catalog-2019

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
003
History - Terex Ritz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 005
Maintenance and Handling of

Hot Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 006
Basic Maintenance of
Hot Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 006
Characteristics of
Hot Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 007
Use of Hot Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 007
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 008
Reference Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
PRODUCT GROUP
A Load Lifting Tools and Acessories . . . 011 G Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B Hand Sticks and Universal Tools . . . . 033 H Bare-Hand Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
C Conductor Support Equipment . . . . . 063 I Tool Repair and Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
D Temporary Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

J Daylight Warning Spheres . . . . . . . . . 209
L Grounding Equipment, Telescopic

E Ladders, Platforms and Scaffolds . . . 139 and Sectional Hot Sticks . . . . . . . . . . 215
F Insulating Cover-Up Equipment . . . . . 163 M Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
PRODUCT CATALOG 001 TEREX RITZ

1° METHOD - HOT STICK METHOD
INTRODUCTION
In this method, the first to be developed, the
PRECAUTIONS FOR electrician performs operations using tools attached
to the end of a insulating stick. This method is
HOT LINE TOOLS designed for work on all voltage classes.
The hot line tools described in this catalog must be For voltages up to 69 kV, where phase distances
handled, installed, and stored only by trained are shorter, conductors are removed from their
personnel who are familiar with the operating original position by means of support poles, clamps
procedures and in compliance with applicable etc.
safety standards.
The entire hot line toolkit is designed to make it
The information contained in this catalog and any easier for electricians to move around structures
other information in the instruction manuals shall with total safety.
under no circumstances replace proper training and
experience in safety procedures. In addition, they In this method the electrician must strictly observe
do not cover all details on the tools, nor cover every the phase-to-phase and phase-phase minimum
possible situation concerning tool installation, safety distance according to the table.
operation, and maintenance.
Rated Voltage Phase-ground Phase-phase
For further information or special requests not (kV) distance (m) distance (m)
included in this catalog, Terex Ritz should be
contacted to assist in developing the most viable 0.05 a 1.0 Avoid contact Avoid contact
solution.
1.1 a 15 0.64 0.66
Terex Ritz is continually looking for ways to improve
its products and services. Therefore, the 15.1 a 36 0.72 0.77
information in this catalog may be changed without
36.1 a 46 0.77 0,85
prior notice, always in view of the total safety of
electricians involved in the maintenance activities in 46.1 a 72.5 0.90 1.05
electrical systems.
72.6 a 121 0.95 1.29
HOT LINE WORKING METHODS 138 a 145 1.09 1.50
The great need to avoid undesirable power 161 a 169 1.22 1.71
maintenance shutdowns required the development
of safe techniques and practices for uninterrupted 230 a 242 1.59 2.27
power supply, without negatively affecting
245 a 326 2.59 3.80
generation, transmission, and distribution utilities.
Not only financially, but also regarding how these 500 a 550 3.42 5.50
utilities are seen by their consumers.
765 a 800 4.53 7.91
The numberless services to be performed in different
voltage classes and different types of electrical
installations, such as transmission lines, substations The recommended safety distances in this table are
and distribution networks, have encouraged the in accordance with OSHA publication on
development of tools, as well as unique and situation- 01/31/1994.
specific working methods, depending on the type
and location of the tasks to be performed and even
the criteria defined by each utility.
Now the electrical system has three hot line working
methods that can be applied in many voltage
classes, provided electrician teams are properly
trained and have proper tools, personal protective
equipment (PPE), and collective protective
equipment (CPE).
INTRODUCTION 003 TEREX RITZ

2° METHOD - RUBBER GLOVE METHOD When near energized conductors, the electrician
connects this suit to a conductor, and then it will be
This method comprises of protecting the electrician at the same potential as the installation.
with gloves and appropriate insulating sleeves
(PPE), positioned on a platform, scaffold, ladder, or For insulating protection and locomotion of the
man basket, performing the services with protected earth potential to the energized installation potential,
hands. Terex Ritz currently has several insulating equipment
for each type of installation, such as ladders, chairs,
The entire work area is also protected with insulating extensions, scaffolding, and others.
insulating covers (CPE) and, during the tasks, the
space strictly necessary for operation is uncovered. Before each use, these equipments must be
This rules out the chances of electricians or work submitted to voltage tests, using the energized
components (conductors, tools) touching or conductor at hand as voltage source and measuring
approaching two points of different potentials, the leakage current must be monitored by a micro
causing a short circuit. ammeter - Micro-Tester (RC402-0288) - installed
between the bottom end of the equipment and the
This method is only used for distribution networks ground point, to check its insulating conditions in
and substations with voltages up to 35 kV. accordance with the leakage current values
established by standard.
3° METHOD - BAREHAND METHOD
For field tests of insulating equipment, using a
The purpose of this method is to allow for greater portable electric pole tester (Ritz Tester) is also
maintenance resources, especially on high to ultra- recommended as another important certification
high voltage transmission lines where safety measure of insulating conditions of this equipment
distances are greater, as well as substations of 60 before each use.
kV and more.
As with the Hot-Stick Work Method, the Barehand
Barehand work is based on the Faraday Cage Work Method requires strict observance of phase-
principle and consists of direct contact of the ground and phase-phase safety distances,
electrician with the energized conductor. especially in substation interventions where these
To protect against electric field effects, the distances are reduced.
electrician wears a conductive suit over his/her
body, leaving only part of his/her face uncovered.
TEREX RITZ 004 INTRODUCTION

HISTORY - TEREX RITZ
Terex Corporation – a manufacturer of a broad Thus, in 1950, in the United States, research began
range of equipment for customers in a number of on a resistant, lightweight product with high
industries (such as construction, infrastructure, electrical and mechanical reliability. In 1959, this
manufacturing, shipping, transportation, refining, research resulted in the development of a fiberglass
energy, utilities, quarrying, and mining) – acquired, reinforced pipe, which was initially used for
in October 2011, the controlling interest of Ritz do maintenance above 500 kV.
Brasil S.A., which specializes in designing and
Fiberglass reinforced tubes manufactured by Terex
manufacturing equipment for maintenance work on
Ritz are known as RITZGLAS® and are
de-energized and energized electrical systems. The
internationally recognized for their quality and
company also offers: a complete portfolio of tools
reliability.
for hot line maintenance work up to 800 kV; rubber
glove, hot-stick, and barehand methods in
compliance with Brazilian and international
standards and ISO 9001; It also provide services to
electric power companies (Generation -
Transmission - Distribution), as well as their
contractors, throughout Brazil and in over 60
countries.
In 1971, the Brazilian company Ritz Comércio e
Indústria Ltda., predecessor of Ritz do Brasil S.A.,
developed its first reinforced fiberglass pipes for
maintenance in energized networks: Hot Sticks. The
reason is that the company already had mastered
this technology applied to oil circuit breakers. In
1972, Ritz launched the first complete set of tools
for maintenance on power grids. In 1973, an
association took place with a US company, a world
leader in the line tools industry.
Finally, in 1989, the interest of the US partner in the
company was repurchased by the Ritz family and
the company was renamed Ritz do Brasil SA
Hot line maintenance first took place in 1913, when The RITZGLAS® Insulating Tube is an integral part
a wooden hot-stick was used for opening an of most Terex Ritz hot line tools. It has a single-cell
energized circuit breaker. Maintenance techniques polyurethane foam core internally, which prevents
in powered networks have been progressively the absorption and condensation of moisture or dirt.
improved as follows: Its external construction is made up of highly treated
glass fibers, circumferentially and longitudinally
1937 - Work performed up to class 34.5 kV. arranged and impregnated with specially formulated
1948 - Change of insulators at 287 kV. epoxy resin, giving it high dielectric strength and
high mechanical strength, essential for hot line
1954 - Change of insulators at 330 kV. tools.
1957 - Change of insulators at 500 kV. The orange color of the RITZGLAS® pole is
1964 - Works performed at 735 kV. suitable for good visibility in work areas and is
considered an added safety feature for the
electrician team.
All works were still carried out with wooden sticks. This tube is subjected to a series of tests in our
With the advent of increasing voltages and constant laboratory based on ASTM F-711 and IEC 60855
maintenance, wood tools have become heavy and standards and released for use only after approval
difficult to handle.
HISTORY 005 TEREX RITZ

PRESERVATION AND HANDLING BASIC MAINTENANCE OF LIVE
OF LIVE LINE TOOLS LINE TOOLS
Hot line tools require specific care for their Hot-sticks under ideal conditions of use, require the
protection in order to keep them available for following periodic care:
immediate use. In addition, such care will result in
prolonged tool life and consequently increased user
safety and confidence. - Cleaning the Hot-sticks
As a rule, hot line tools should be kept dry. They Most impurities are removed by wiping the stick
should never be placed directly on the ground and with a dry cloth. If the stick is impregnated with
should be stored in the vehicle or tool cart until the grease, wipe it with a cloth soaked in isopropyl
moment of use and then placed on a support (stick alcohol or EcoThinner that will not leave any
rack). Tools may only be placed on previously residue. After being clean and dry, they are rubbed
covered soil with a clean, dry tarpaulin to protect with a cloth for cleaning sticks, which is actually a
them from direct contact with dust or moisture. cloth impregnated with substance to protect them.
Then, the rod is electrically tested using the Ritz
Due to the nature of the application and the variable Tester pole tester. This should be done to check
severity under which live-line tools are subjected, that all impurities have been removed.
we suggest the following regarding their use
condition:
- Hot-stick repair
a. Visual inspection before each use;
The gloss restorer should be applied only when it is
b. Mechanical tests with the application of the rated evident that the coating film is in poor condition.
load of the tools, with a periodicity to be defined Before applying the gloss restorer, dry the stick.
by the user, which should consider the severity Then use a fine sandpaper to remove the old gloss
of the previous uses; restorer. The stick should be cleaned again using
c. Periodic electrical testing as determined by the solvent and then dried with a clean cloth before
international standards and NR-10. gloss restorer application.
Severity means: exposure of tools to excessive load;

load imbalance; chemical corrosion by apparent and - Rupture repair
non-apparent chemical agents; impacts; improper If more than superficial damage is identified the
maintenance (no gap treatment; poor lubrication; no rupture restorer may be used to fill the damaged
replacement of worn components or replacement area. Then use a fine sandpaper to remove excess
with components not approved by the restorer fluid. To use cracks and shine restorers,
manufacturer; localized malfunction in a component refer to our Stick and Pole Recovery Manual.
that could compromise an entire toolkit etc.);
improper storage and packaging for transport and
storage etc.
TEREX RITZ 006 PRESERVATION AND HANDLING

CHARACTERISTICS OF LIVE LINE USING LIVE LINE TOOLS
TOOLS Prior to each use, live line tools must be visually
inspected and electrically tested, which can be
Live-line tools consist primarily of RITZGLAS® done by the user. Before being carried to the
poles and metal parts in special aluminum and electricians on the structure, the tools should be
bronze alloys. Given the nature of their application, cleaned using a dry cloth and then a stick cleaning
where safety standards are implicitly contained in cloth. During these cleaning operations, a visual
the working standards themselves, these tools are inspection of the metal and insulating parts can be
manufactured under strict quality control, from raw carried out
material selection to final reception testing.
RITZGLAS® poles are electrically tested during
manufacture with 100 kV every 30 cm in
accordance with ASTM F-711.
The aluminum parts are heat treated under strict
temperature control in order to preserve the
physical properties of the basic material as much as
possible.
No new type of tool is available to the market
without type testing to ensure its constructive and
operational design characteristics.
IMPORTANT:
Maintenance of live-line tools should be treated as a
critical process and manufacturer recommendations
must be strictly followed.
LIVE LINE TOOLS 007 TEREX RITZ

- Catenary
GLOSSARY Uniform curve assumed by a body (e.g. cable)
when suspended by its two ends (pole) and under
For the better understanding of the reader about the the sole action of its own weight.
definitions, units of measure, symbols,
abbreviations, and keywords addressed in this - Work Length
catalog, we present a brief description of their Useful distance between tool coupling points
meanings. (energized side and de-energized side).
- Insulating Length
Safety distance limit for each hot line tool. This
DEFINITIONS
length is usually located between the point of
- Extra-strengh laminated aluminum contact with the energized part and the electrician's
Aluminum alloy plates used in the construction of holding point (or de-energized part).
some yoke models to make them light and sturdy.
These yokes are characterized by their construction - Total Length
with plain plates construction. Distance between ends of a hot line tool.
- Jaws Opening Capacity - Phase-to-phase distance

Limit measures (minimum and maximum) adopted Minimum distance between two phases, with
for closing and opening the grounding clamps and different potentials in the same circuit.
some insulating poles, compatible with the cable
- Phase-to-ground distance
and conductor sizes that will be used.
Minimum distance between an energized and a de-
- Rated Current Capacity energized part of an electrical installation.
Current withstand unit of an electrical conductor
- Tracking effect
during a given operating time.
Irreversible degradation caused by the formation of
In our case, the cables used in temporary paths that start and develop on the surface of an
grounding and hot line jumpers. insulating material, being favorable to electric
current conduction through these paths, even when
- Work Load Capacity dry.
Maximum workload value set for hot line tools
(defined in daN). - Structures
The values for these loads are specified in this Buildings such as towers, poles of wood, concrete
catalog. or steel to support electricity conductors, so that
the electrical power can be transported over long
- Balanced Maximum Load distances.
When tensile forces or loads are evenly distributed
over the lifting equipment. - Bending
Application of perpendicular forces to the axis of a
- Unbalanced Maximum Load body, which is supported by one or two points.
When tensile forces or loads are unevenly
distributed over the lifting equipment, thus reducing - Faraday's Cage
its rated capacity. Physics Principle, developed by Michael Faraday
(1791-1867), where inside an enclosed conductive
- Shear surface the electric field is null. In order to shield
Application of two forces in opposite directions, and protect the electrician against the effect of an
converging, with the same direction and electric field when in contact with the potential,
perpendicular to the axis of a body, tending to divide conductive clothing is used.
it into two parts.
TEREX RITZ 008 GLOSSARY

- Electrical Interventions - Dielectric strength
Maintenance performed on electrical systems, in Higher electric field value of an insulating tool
order to continue the transmission of electricity without it becoming a conductor.
through specific procedures and by qualified This dielectric strength varies from tool to tool, for
persons. example: in the case of air, its dielectric strength is
about 3.0 kV/mm. Thus, when an electric field in the
- Handling
air exceeds this value, it ceases to be insulating and
Manually using hot line tools or other instruments.
becomes conductive.
- Jaw
- Rated Voltage
Moving part of grounding clamps, yokes, or
Maximum allowable electrical voltage value for work
insulating poles for the purpose of securing the
on insulating equipment.
conductor or various couplings.
Usually these jaws are driven by turning the - Traction
clamping screws (for grounding clamps) or the pole Application of forces acting perpendicular to the
itself. cross section of a body and with the same
direction, but in opposite directions, tending to
- Operate lengthen it.
Using hot line equipment or other instruments in
interventions on energized installations, within the - Torsion
procedures and characteristics of each product. Applying a circular force to the end of a body that
tends to deform it.
- Low Voltage Networks (LV)
Circuits exceeding 50 volts, equal to or less than 1 - Torque
kV, between phases or between phases and A vector quantity defined as the fraction of a force
ground. applied to an object, which is effectively used to
rotate around an axis or center point, known as a
- Medium-Voltage Network (MV) : pivot point. As an example, in the grounding
Circuits with voltages above 1 kV to 50 kV, which clamps, the torque is applied to the clamping
generally distribute the power received from screws, whose values are in this catalog and
transmission systems to large, medium, and small defined in daN.m.
consumers.
- Thermal treatment
- High Voltage Networks (HV) A process by which cast aluminum components
Circuits with voltages above 50 kV up to 230 kV, and/or parts are subjected to high temperature
responsible for transporting electricity from treatment in order to increase their mechanical
production to consumption centers. strength.
- Extra High Voltage Networks (EHV) - Use Tools in line
Circuits with voltages above 230 kV to 750 kV, also Installing two or more tools sequentially for the
responsible for transporting electricity from purpose of increasing isolation in the intervention.
production centers to consumption centers, usually Example: Use of a nylon strap coupled to an
over longer distances. insulating pole for hoists and blocks.
- Ultra High Voltage Networks (UHV)
Circuits with voltages above 750 kV, also
responsible for transporting electricity from
production centers to consumption centers, usually
over greater distances.
GLOSSARY 009 TEREX RITZ

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS / ABBREVIATIONS
- Ampere (A) - Ø (diameter)
Electrical current measurement unit that, with an Geometric figure with same midpoints of parallel
electromotive force of 1 Volt it travels a circuit with a strings to designate the circular measurement of a
resistance of 1 Ohm. given tool.
- AWG - ®
American Wire Gauge, American denomination Trademark of a product or process of a particular
used for wire gauges (thickness). The standard company.
metric series in mm2 is currently used in Brazil.
- ATR
- CA Abbreviation used by Terex Ritz to designate
Brazilian Identification Unit for bare wire cross- Temporary Grounding.
sections without steel core. (equivalent to ASC).
- FLV
- CAA
Abbreviation used by Terex Ritz to designate hot line
Brazilian identification unit for steel core aluminum
Tools.
bare wire cross-section (equivalent to ACSR).
- NBI (Basic Insulation Level)
- Kcmil ACSR (circular mil)
Value (in kV) that a device must withstand when
A circular mil is the area of a circle with a diameter
applying a voltage pulse for a given time without
of one thousandth of an inch. This is one of the
changing its insulating characteristics.
units adopted for wire or cable cross-sections.
- RITZGLAS®
- daN (decaNewtons)
Terex Ritz trademark for the insulating fiberglass
A unit adopted by ABNT for forces exerted on hot
pipe, which is a fundamental integral part of most
line tools. (According to ABNT (Brazilian Technical
live-line tools.
Standards Association), 1 daN is considered 1 kgf
kilogram-force).
- Kilovolt (kV)
Electrical voltage unit equivalent to 1x103 V.
- Volt (V)
Unit of electrical voltage, potential difference or
electromotive force. It corresponds to the voltage
that, applied over the 1 Ohm resistance, produces
the 1 amp current.
TEREX RITZ 010 GLOSSARY

GROUP A
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

AND ACESSORIES
Manual Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 013 Rope Insulating Stick. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 026
Insulating Pole for Hoists and Blocks . . . . 016 Rope Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 026
Gin Pole for Load Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 016 Snatch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028
Crossarm Gin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 018 Sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 030
Insulated Gin Pole / Cargo Boom . . . . . . 019 Wire Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031
Swivel Boom with Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 Tool Bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032
Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 024 Tarpaulin for Live Line Tools. . . . . . . . . . . 032

A
GROUP A
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

AND ACCESSORIES
MANUAL HOISTS
It is used in various construction and maintenance services in electrical
installations. It has a locking device and gradual load lowering and can be
handled in two positions: to the right or left of the load application axis.
Hoists with Nylon Straps

One and two tons hoists, supplied in two handle versions: one with a
plastic terminal (at the end for rubber glove work) and the other for hot-
stick work (via a handle with a rotating eye at the end). Its nylon straps can
be purchased as replacement parts. Drive handle with plastic terminal
WARNING
Nylon strap hoists are not considered insulating tools for working in
energized installations. In this case, its nylon strap should be
supplemented with an insulating pole for hoists and blocks, compatible
with the safety distance table. Drive handle with eye
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

AND ACCESSORIES 013 TEREX RITZ
HOIST WITH NYLON STRAP - 1 TON
A Approx.
Weight.
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
Hoist with nylon strap for 1 ton loads with drive handle
RC309-0323 6.30 13.89
and plastic terminal
RC309-0467 7.20 15.85
and swivel eye
RC309-0323
HOIST WITH NYLON STRAP - 2 TON

Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
RC312-0000 7.80 17.20
and plastic terminal
RC309-0468 8.80 19.40
and swivel eye
The convertible nylon strap hoists are lightweight, sturdy, and versatile.
RC309-0468 They are designed with special features for rubber glove and hot-stick
construction and maintenance services in de-energized or energized
installations method.
CONVERTIBLE STRAP HOISTS (0.75 or 1.5 ton.)

Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
Convertible nylon strap hoist with drive handle and plastic

RC309-0451 5.30 11.68
terminal
RC309-0451 Convertible nylon strap hoist with drive handle with swivel
RC309-0452 5.90 13.00
eye
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

TEREX RITZ 014 AND ACCESSORIES
LOAD CONVERTIBILITY CHARACTERISTICS
Convertible nylon strap hoists for work load conversion capacity of 0.75 ton. A
or 1.5 tons, simply by arranging the nylon straps as shown below:
To use the 0.75 ton load capacity, attach the load hook sheave to the free
end loop of the strap. (See fig. 1).
To convert hoist load capacity from 0.75 ton. to 1.5 ton. keep the load
hook sheave installed in the middle of the nylon strap when it is folded and
with the end of the strap attached to the hoist body. (See fig. 2).
Arrangement to Arrangement to
Distance Between Hooks
0.75 ton. 1.5 ton.
Minimum .................................... 546 mm 546 mm
Maximum .................................... 2740 mm 1370 mm Fig. 1
Chain Ratchet Hoists

Lightweight and quick to operate, it has features for greater operator
productivity when working in tight spaces because its drive handle
operates on all sides of the load.
For easy coupling and load alignment, it has forged steel hooks with a
safety lock and 360° swivel.
For safety reasons, the chains are released for free-form movement only
when there is no load. Fig. 2
The hoists have two control levers: the first to change movement direction;
the second to activate the movement safety lock.
Control levers are easy to operate even with gloves on.
MANUAL CHAIN HOIST

Approx.
Catalog Rated Working Capacity Weight.
Reference (ton.)
kg lb
750E 0.75 7.30 16.09
1500E 1.50 11.50 25.35
3000E 3.00 17.00 37.48
6000E 6.00 23.00 50.70
1500E
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

INSULATING POLE FOR HOISTS AND BLOCKS
A They can safely transform a nylon strap hoist or block into insulating
equipment to use it in energized installations.
It has a steel safety hook at one end and a steel swivel eye at the other. Its
eye is mounted to one of the hoist or block hooks to ensure its insulation
from the grounded parts of the structure.
INSULATING CANE FOR HOISTS AND BLOCKS
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Catalog Ø Capacity Weight.
Lenght
Reference (m)
(mm)
daN lb kg lb
RC400-1175 407 2.00 4.40
RC400-2399 32 487 2000 4409 2.40 5.30
RC400-2400 637 3.10 6.80

RC400-1175
GIN POLE FOR LOAD LIFTING

They are lightweight, mechanically resistant, and easy to install tools. They
have excellent safety and productivity gains in lifting equipment and
materials, as well as in the construction and maintenance of medium
voltage overhead lines.
They were manufactured with cast aluminum metal parts and RITZGLAS®
insulating tube.
IMPORTANT NOTES
- Gins are not designed for applications involving hand rope side pulling
or misaligned loading. Therefore, force direction must be parallel and
aligned with the gin.
- When calculating load capacity, consider a 10% loss due to friction on
pull ropes (friction).
Example: Using a double block lift system the maximum load to be lifted
will be 635 daN (1400 lb). A snatch blocks must be attached to the
base of the frame to pass the hand rope of the block.
Using a simple lifting system the maximum load will be 408 daN (900 lb).
Hoist load plus pulling force and frictional force equals gin capacity.
- RC400-0090
RC400-0090 Only mount in free areas of the pole (without a spacer saddle).
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

- RC400-0315
It can be coupled to a spacer saddle, which allows it to be mounted next to A
crossarms. It is coupled to the pole by a chain stretcher and tightened by a
handwheel.
- RC400-0578
This gin combines the advantages of a multiple tool in the use of lifting
equipment and materials.
They are coupled to the “T” double concrete pole by two galvanized steel
bolts with wing nuts using the pole holes. RC400-0315
In circular concrete poles, it is coupled by conventional metal straps. Due

to its length, the gin has a platform at its upper part of the pole, helping in
handling lifted equipment.
Since this tool has 04 clamping positions, the following rated working
capacity must be observed:
1° hole: ..................................... 100 daN (220 lb) at base side
2° hole: ..................................... 150 daN (330 lb)
3° hole: ..................................... 200 daN (440 lb)
4° hole: ..................................... 250 daN (550 lb) at upper side.
RC400-0578
GINS FOR LOAD LIFTING
Rated Work Length Approx.

Catalog Capacity Ø (m) Weight.
Description
Reference (mm)
daN lb Insulating Total kg lb
RC400-0090 With chain-mounted pole saddle of 0.92 m 907 2000 76 0.54 0.68 7.10 15.65
With 0.13 m spacer saddle for mounting to pole

RC400-0315 907 2000 76 0.52 0.68 9.80 21.60
through 0.92 m chain
With direct mounting system to square pole

110 to 250 to
RC400-0578 through two screws with wing nut, aid of two 64 1.05 1.83 12.20 26.90
250 550
conventional straps conventional
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

CROSSARM GIN
A It has a fork-shaped saddle, which fits over the distribution crossarm, so
you can use blocks or a hand rope to lift the conductors over their
insulators. It can be reversed and has a removable galvanized steel pin for
a better fit over the crossarm.
30º máx.
CROSSARM GIN
Rated Work
Crossarm Capacity Insulating Approx. Weight.
Catalog
Description Dimensions Max Angle 30º Length
Reference
(mm) (m)
daN lb kg lb
RH20 Convertible 340 750 0.71 7.70 16.96

89 x 114 to121 x 146
RT400-0870 Convertible 227 500 1.06 8.20 18.00
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

INSULATED GIN POLE / CARGO BOOM
The heavy load lifting gin is made with RITZGLAS® square tube and has
A
three chain stretchers, with handwheels for coupling to the structures.
The square head at the top of the pole has two shackles for easy load
fixing. By attaching a collar to the coupling on top of this pole, a claw pole
can be used for increased stabilization.
The load lift boom has a square collar (RE400-0434) installed near its end.
This collar can be adjusted in three positions for better positioning of the
lifting load as well as its retention to the structure.
The lower coupling hinged saddle allows the boom to be moved 90°, i.e.
from horizontal to vertical and vice versa, as well as to rotate 180°.
Its upper head is similar to that of the gin pole.
NOTE
Rated work loads include pulling force.
GIN POLE
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Catalog £ Length
Capacity Weight.
Reference (mm) (m)
daN lb kg lb
RC400-0470 2.28 33.20 73.19

100 x 100 2268 5000
RC400-0472 3.50 40.40 89.07
RC400-0470
CARGO BOOM
RE400-0434
Rated Work Approx.
Insulating
Catalog £ Length
Capacity
Mounting
Weight.
Reference (mm) (m)
daN lb kg lb
RC400-0475 Post 45.60 100.53

100 x 100 4.72 454 1000
RC400-0483 Tower 45.00 99.21
RC400-0475
SPARE PART
Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
RE400-0434 Square collar for cargo boom 4.00 8.82
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

SWIVEL BOOM WITH MAST
A
R070496
The boom pole with mast is intended for heavy duty high voltage
structures, particularly for removing insulator chains with the aid of the
cradle.
In the boom poles with mast (RC400-0469 and RH1973/H-10) two
saddles (R070496) already included are used to attach the gin to the pole:
one at the top and one at the bottom. These saddles have handwheel chain
stretchers.
In the boom poles with mast (RC400-0464, RC400-0465 and RH1973-814),
designed for tower mounting, two hardware models are used: a saddle
RC400-0602
(RC400-0602) mounted on the underside, which is attached to the tower,
with two sets of screws and angle jaws, and a triple fork (FLV01644-1),
already included, installed on the upper side, for coupling the rail poles.
When the mast is not necessary, the adapter (FLV18133-1) must be used
to couple the boom to the saddle (RC400-0602).
The coupling and the formation of the mast stabilization tripod on the metal
FLV01644-1 frame are made by three rail rods (RH4721-112) and respective metal
frame saddles (RM4742-3), both specified separately.
The rail rods have heat-treated aluminum alloy heads and forged steel
swivel eye.
On all models, the mast is held in the mast with a tourniquet pole
(RC400-0816) and a hoist (1500E), both specified separately.
FLV18133-1 The mobile collar on the square boom (RC400-0464, RC400-0465 and
RC400-0469) can be adjusted to three different positions for easy
operation of the assembly at different angles of the insulator chain. The
boom has at its end an auxiliary head with two shackles for retaining or
holding additional loads, tools, etc
RH4721-112
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

A
Mast
Boom

Composition of the Set
Approx.
Weight.
RC400-0602
Catalog £ Rated Work
FLV01644-1
R070496
Ø 76 mm
Reference 100 x 100 mm Capacity
Mast Insulating
Length (m) Boom Insulating
Length (m)
daN lb kg lb
RC400-0464* 2.30 4.72 01 01 - 58.50 128.97
RC400-0465* 2.91 5.33 454 1000 01 01 - 63.90 140.88
RC400-0469** 2.91 5.33 - - 02 63.90 140.88
* Metal structure coupling | ** Pole coupling
NOTE
The swivel boom with mast has the rated working capacity above only when
mounted with the arm support tripod, consisting of 3 rail poles, 1 tourniquet
pull pole, and 1 2-ton hoist (purchased separately).
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

A
The square swivel boom extension is used to bring the electrician to

potential through the potential access chair (FLV12563-1).
It has two Ø 76 mm bronze alloy collars (FLV00196-5) for coupling to the
square head and the square collar of the boom pole. It also has a head
with two eyes, one for installation of the potential access chair and other
for bracing with an insulating pole and block.
EXTENSION FOR SQUARE SWIVEL BOOM WITH MAST
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Length
Reference (mm)
(m)
daN lb kg lb
FLV18617-1 FLV18617-1 76 4.00 140 309 16.64 36.68
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Composition of the Set A
Approx.
Weight.
RC400-0602
Catalog Rated Work
FLV01644-1
R070496
Ø 76 mm Ø 76 mm
Reference Capacity
Mast Insulating Boom Insulation
Length (m) Length (m)
daN lb kg lb
RH1973-814* 2.30 4.09 01 01 - 38.80 85.54

227 500
RH1973/H-10** 2.91 2.87 - - 02 27.60 60.85
* Metal structure coupling. | ** Pole coupling
1 - RH1973-814 3 - RC400-0816 5 - RM4742-3 7 - RH1950-90

2 - RH4721-112 4 - 1500E 6 - RH4722 8 - RH1950-9
(Items 2 through 8: separate specifications)
NOTE
For loads greater than 272 daN (600 lb) we suggest using the metal frame
saddle (RM4742) with a 76 mm bronze alloy collar (FLV00196-5) and an
identical rear collar to prevent slippage of the rail pole used on the mast
support tripod.
ACCESSORY FOR SWIVEL BOOM WITH MAST

Approx.
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
R070496 Saddle 7.00 15.43
RC400-0602 Saddle for Tower Bracket 10.30 22.70
FLV01644-1 Triple Fork 1.95 4.30
FLV00196-5 Bronze alloy collar Ø 76 mm 2.62 5.78
FLV18133-1 Swivel Boom adapter to the structure 1.00 2.20
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

ROPE
A The polypropylene rope was selected for its mechanical strength, reduced
elongation, and lightness.
This rope, like all other ropes for hot line work, should always be kept
clean and stored in a dry place and sheltered from the sun.
Although the polypropylene rope has good dielectric strength when new, it
is not insulating for hot line work. Therefore, if it contacts energized parts,
an insulating rope spacer must be used with it.
It comes in white color, with three-legged polypropylene multifilament
formation and a 220 meter roll.
ROPE
Minimum
Rated Working Approx.
Ø Breaking
Catalog Capacity Weight.
Strength
Reference
in. mm daN lb daN lb kg/m lb/m
RM1895-1 1/4" 6.00 107 236 537 1184 0.02 0.04
RM1895-2 3/8" 9.50 230 507 1153 2542 0.04 0.09
RM1895-3 1/2" 12.50 402 886 2010 4430 0.07 0.15
RM1895-4 5/8" 15.50 582 1283 2910 6415 0.12 0.26
RM1895-5 3/4" 19.00 734 1618 3670 8090 0.17 0.37
* 20% of minimum breaking strength
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Polydacron Rope
Three-legged fiber twisted rope combined with excellent service life and A
high strength-to-weight ratio. The rope is made of high-strength polyester
surface yarns wrapped in high tenacity polyolefin fiber. It also offers the
durability of polyester, but with greater strength than other ropes due to the
combination with polyolefin fiber.
The rope is not considered insulating for hot line work. Therefore, if it
contacts energized parts, an insulating rope spacer must be used with it.
POLYDRACON ROPE
Minimum
Ø Breaking
Strength
Reference
in. mm daN lb daN lb kg/m lb/m
RM1896-2 3/8" 9.50 335 740 1700 3700 0.05 0.11
RM1896-3 1/2" 12.50 560 1240 2800 6200 0.09 0.20
RM1896-4 5/8" 15.50 815 1800 4100 9000 0.14 0.31
* 20% of minimum breaking strength
The bag is used for transportation and storage of ropes used in hot line
interventions, to avoid contamination and easy handling.
Made of waterproof material, it has metal eyes and a rope on its edge for
proper closure.
ROPE STORAGE
Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV16364-1 Storage and transport bag Ø 300 mm x 400 mm deep 1.90 4.19
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

ROPE INSULATING STICK
A It is used in series with the polypropylene rope when its direct contact with
live parts of the installation is likely.
It is made with RITZGLAS® tube, heat treated aluminum alloy heads, and
forged steel swivel eyes.
ROPE INSULATING STICK

Insulating
Length
Reference (mm)
(m)
daN lb kg lb
FLV04803-1 0.42 0.63 1.39
FLV04803-2 25.4 1.04 800 1764 0.95 2.09
FLV04803-3 1.54 1.15 2.54
ROPE BLOCKS
With thermoplastic housings and sheaves, steel hooks with safety locks
(with continuous rotation on their shaft), it provides easier coupling and
alignment with the load.
When only blocks are purchased, we note that the pairs are formed with
one block unit with rope strap (FLV10893-1) and another unit without this
device (RC400-0918).
Common Rope Blocks

Equipped with an eye for hot-stick mounting.
Block dielectric strength: 30 kV
Light Block
Compact and sturdy, this tool has been specially developed for use in
electrical and telephone installations, lifting loads, cable pulling, gins, etc.
It has 15 meters of rope (RM1895-2).
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

ROPE BLOCKS
Rated Work Approx.

A
Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Complete double block mounted with 38 m

RC400-0914 1589 3500 7.20 15.87
rope (RM1895-3) RC400-0915
Complete triple block mounted with 45 m

RC400-0915 1589 3500 7.90 17.40
rope (RM1895-3)
Triple block with 45m Polydracon rope

RC400-0925 1589 3500 8.00 17.5 RC400-0917
(RM1896-3)
RC400-0916 Single block (1 sheave) without strap loop 907 2000 0.96 2.10
RC400-0918
RC400-0917 Single block (1 sheave) with strap loop 907 2000 1.05 2.30
RC400-0918 Triple block (3 sheaves) without strap loop 1589 3500 2.00 4.40
FLV10893-1
FLV10893-1 Triple block (3 sheaves) with strap loop 1589 3500 2.00 4.40
RC400-0919 Double block (2 sheaves) without strap loop 1589 3500 2.00 4.40
Block for double block (2 sheaves) with strap

FLV16813-1 1589 3500 2.00 4.40
loop
Complete lightweight double block with

FLV07777-1 400 880 2.10 4.62
15 m rope (RM1895-2)
FLV07777-1
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

SNATCH BLOCKS
A Indispensable equipment in cargo handling and lifting operations in
construction and maintenance work in electrical and telephone
installations.
The two versions of hooks available (drawn or forged steel) are designed
for easy mounting of the snatch block to their installation location.
The body and sheave are constructed of heat treated aluminum alloy and
have a folding device to allow the introduction of a quick swiveling service
rope over the sheave.
The RC417-6067 and R2230-1 have forged steel hooks and safety lock,
and the R2230-2 have a cold drawn steel hook without safety lock.
The rope hook is made of stainless steel and is designed for easy lifting of
loads or tools. It has two holes to mount the rope and its tip is slightly
curved for easy tool introduction.
NOTES
1. For safety reasons, hoisted equipment should always be seated on the
hook bed when transporting..
2. The spool bracket (RM1979) is made with angle bracket, continuously
rotating forged steel eye for spool support, bronze claws, two steel bolts
and wing nuts for attachment to the metal frame.
3. The five holes in the snatch block holder allow them to fit differently
sized metal structures.
A/ A/
2 2
A
/
2
A = Rated Working Capacity
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Catalog
Reference Description
ALUMINUM SNATCH BLOCKS
Rated Work Approx. A

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
For ropes up to Ø 5/8”, with forged steel

RC417-6067 1134 2500 2.60 5.70
hook and safety lock
RC417-6067
For ropes up to Ø 5/8”, with forged steel

R2230-1 567 1250 1.10 2.42
hook and safety lock
R2230-2 For ropes up to Ø 5/8”, with drawn steel 567 1250 1.0 2.42
R2230-1
SNATCH BLOCKS ACCESSORY
Rated Work Approx.

Description R2230-2
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Stainless steel alloy rope hook.

RM1849 227 500 0.30 0.66
It has two holes for rope mounting
Stainless steel alloy rope hook.

FLV29635-1 It has two holes rope mounting with safety 227 500 0.30 0.66
lock
RM1849
Aluminum snatch block support with

fitting for metal frame mounting and
RM1979 567 1250 6.00 13.20
76 x 76 mm flaps and total length of
475 mm
RM1979
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

SLING
A The webbing slings (non-insulating) have been designed to couple loads to
A
the respective tools or traction equipment and from these to the work
structure. They are therefore widely used in cargo handling and traction of
electrical and telephone cables. Models made without any metal
components are easy to handle and pack due to their flexibility.
They are available in two basic types:
“Return Eye’’ Style

One size only. This model was primarily designed for the hanger
RC417-0133 arrangement, but can also be used with upright hooks and basket.
‘’Endless’’ Model
With five size options. This is the most versatile model of all. It can be used
in vertical, hanger or basket arrangements, and adapts well to the shape of
the load. It provides greater grip strength and upright support. It's easier to
use and longer lasting because it has no eyes that establish wear points.
RC417-0134
POLYESTER WEBBING SLINGS

Rated Working Capacity
by lifting type
Catalog Width Comp.

Type
Reference (mm) (m)
from 45º
Basket Strength Vertical up to 45º to 60º
daN lb daN lb daN lb daN lb daN lb
RC417-0133 60 1.83 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410 Return Eye
RC417-0134 30 0.92 2000 4410 800 1764 1000 2205 1400 3086 1000 2205
RC417-0135 30 1.22 2000 4410 800 1764 1000 2205 1400 3086 1000 2205
RC417-0136 30 1.52 2000 4410 800 1764 1000 2205 1400 3086 1000 2205
RC417-0137 30 1.83 2000 4410 800 1764 1000 2205 1400 3086 1000 2205
RC417-0138 30 2.44 2000 4410 800 1764 1000 2205 1400 3086 1000 2205
Endless
RC417-0139 60 0.92 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410
RC417-0140 60 1.22 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410
RC417-0141 60 1.52 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410
RC417-0142 60 1.83 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410
RC417-0143 60 2.44 4000 8818 1600 3527 2000 4410 2800 6173 2000 4410
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Nylon looped slings are made with nylon strap, providing more malleability
and grip without damaging the object being handled.
A
They come in three different lengths with equal load capacity in the three
configurations: basket, hanger, and vertical.
They have steel rings at their ends, with surface treatment in D-shape, for
easy mounting with a hot stick.
NYLON SLINGS WITH RINGS
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Catalog Width Capacity Weight.
Length
Reference (mm)
(m)
daN lb kg lb
FLV06619-1 0.50 0.55 1.21
FLV06619-2 50 0.80 670 1477 0.65 1.43
FLV06619-3 1.20 0.75 1.65

FLV06619-2
WIRE GRIPS
Intended for hot line conductor straining.
The movable grip on top provides its installation to the conductor by using
an insulating hot stick and also, when loose, it can be used as a locking
device, preventing it from falling off accidentally.
LIVE LINE WIRE GRIPS

Conductor Ø
Rated Capacity
(mm) Approx.
Jaw
Catalog Weight.
Reference Work Rupture
Minimum Maximum
daN lb daN lb Type Material kg lb
51.E07.D20-CE 5.08 10.16 800 1764 2000 4409 1.48 3.26
51.E07.D30-CE 7.87 13.50 800 1764 2000 4409 1.90 4.19

DR Bronze
51.E07.D40-CE 13.41 18.80 1700 3748 3600 7937 3.50 7.72
51.E07.D50-CE 18.80 21.80 1700 3748 3600 7937 3.50 7.72
The DR (Double Round) jaw shape is suitable for aluminum and copper
cables
DR Jaw
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

TOOL BUCKET
A Useful for storage, transporting, and especially lifting hot line tools on the
work structure, this bag provides protection and safety when moving them.
Made of waterproof material, it has a reinforced bottom and polypropylene
rope handle attached to the edge of the bucket through metal eyes.
TOOL BUCKET
Approx.
Catalog Ø Deepness Weight.
Reference (mm) (mm)
kg lb
RC417-0144 305 380 0.49 1.08
TARPAULIN FOR LIVE LINE TOOLS

It is used as a soil cover for the purpose of placing the selected tools for
interventions in installations. In addition to protecting them against
contamination, it establishes a place for inspection and selection of
equipment to be used.
This tarpaulin is made of double-sided vinyl.
WATERPROOF TARPAULIN
Approx.
Catalog Dimensions Weight.
Reference (m)
kg lb
RT306-0014 4x3 9.15 20.17
LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

GROUP B
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL TOOLS
Pole Handling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035 Tool Rack and Crossarm Tool Hanger . . . 045
Grip-all Clampsticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036

Universal Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 046
Grip-all Clampstick Extension . . . . . . . . . 038

Lever Type Wire Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 056
Wire-holding Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038
Tie Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039 Tree Trimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058
Insulating Grip Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039 Universal Tool Head For Cutting Wires . . 058
All-angle Cog Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 040

Kite Buster Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059
Flexible Insulated Wrenches . . . . . . . . . . 041
Rescue Hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060

Volt-ammeter Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043
Universal Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 044 Measuring Stick And Extension . . . . . . . . 061

B
GROUP B
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL TOOLS
POLE HANDLING TOOLS
It is made with RITZGLAS® tube and designed to rotate poles or other
cross-sections (hexagonal, square) made of wood, metal or concrete for
mounting positioning.
The RC305-0021 has a 48 mm wide and 1.83 m long nylon strap and has
a capacity of up to 3402 daN / 7500 lb tensile strength, firmly gripping the RC305-0021
posts up to Ø 480 mm, including smooth surfaces.
The RC305-0008 has a hinged galvanized steel hook at its end and
adjustable mounting. So it can grab wooden posts of different diameters.
The RC200T has jaws to grab poles from Ø 180 to 406 mm.
POLE HANDLING TOOLS (Ø 51 mm)

Approx. RC305-0008
Insulating
Catalog Weight
Description Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
RC305-0021 With nylon strap to move poles 1.22 2.90 6.39
With steel hook to move wooden

RC305-0008 1.22 3.40 7.50
poles
RC200T For posts from Ø 180 to 406 mm 0.85 6.00 13.22
RC200T
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL TOOLS 035 TEREX RITZ
GRIP-ALL CLAMPSTICKS
It has a mechanism comprising a folding and retractable hook at its end,
operated by an adjustable handle in its grip region in three basic working
positions through a rack and two safety locks, making it a practical multi-
B purpose tool.
Among its various applications, we highlight mounting and removal work of
hot line clamps, temporary grounding assemblies, hot line protective
covers, measuring instruments and others.
OPEN CLOSED RETRACTED

Position to hook the eye of the In this position, the hook The hook retracted inside the
grounding clamp or other part wraps around the grounding head keeps the grounding
to be handled. clamp eye, holding it securely, clamp rigidly attached to the
but still pivoting, allowing a pole for its mounting and
twisting movement, including removal.
at angles.
Insulating Length
GRIP-ALL CLAMPSTICKS
Dimensions
Maximum Approx.
Catalog Use Weight
Insulating Total
Reference Ø Voltage
Length Length
(mm) (kV)
(m) (m) kg lb
FLV08958-1 0.54 1.43 15 2.15 4.74

LIGHT MODEL
FLV08958-2 0,74 2.04 35 2.50 5.51
FLV08958-3 25 1.30 2.65 138 2.85 6.28
FLV08958-4 1.86 3.26 230 3.20 7.05
FLV08958-5 2.42 3.87 345 3.55 7.83
RC403-0291 0.54 1.43 15 2.40 5.29

NORMAL MODEL
RC403-0292 0.74 2.04 35 2.70 5.95
RC403-0293 32 1.30 2.65 138 3.20 7.05
RC403-0294 1.86 3.26 230 3.60 7.94
RC403-0295 2.42 3.87 345 4.10 9.04
HAND STICKS AND

TEREX RITZ 036 UNIVERSAL TOOLS
GRIP-ALL CLAMPSTICKS - FOLDING MODEL
Dimensions
Approx.
Max Use
Catalog Weight (kg)
Insulating Voltage
Reference Ø Folded Extended
Length (kV)
(mm) (m) (m)
(m) kg lb
B
RC403-0296 0.95 1.01 2.00 36 3.00 6.60
RC403-0297 1.37 1.32 2.59 138 3.60 7.90
RC403-0298 1.98 1.60 3.20 230 4.00 4.80

32
RC403-0299 2.59 1.93 3.81 345 4.40 9.70
RC403-0342 3.20 2.23 4.42 450 4.80 10.50
RC403-0343 3.81 2.54 5.03 500 5.10 11.20
The applicability of the grip-all clampstick can be further enhanced by

purchasing a RM1867 adapter.
Rated working capacity (traction) is 133 daN (293 lb) for all models.
The RE403-2543P collar can be used on any grip-all clampstick, especially
longer ones, which require a great deal of effort from the electrician to hold
it when in use, especially in the horizontal position.
The collar is attached to the clampstick by adjusting the halves of the ring
and tightening it by its screws. This ring has a central housing for the pole
and its control rod, thus not interfering with its operating mechanism. RE403-2543P
To maintain a safe insulation distance in hot line work, it should be used in

series with a rope and a tourniquet draw pole of appropriate insulating
length
ACCESSORY
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RM1867
RM1867 Universal adapter 0.14 0.31
RE403-2543P Auxiliary collar with hoisting ring 0.42 0.93
PACKAGING
Bags for storage and transport for the clampstick are provided separately.
RE403-2543P
HAND STICKS AND

GRIP-ALL CLAMPSTICK EXTENSION
Extensions are easily adaptable to the head of any RITZGLAS® clampstick
model and are designed to extend length without compromising
performance.
B
GRIP-ALL CLAMPSTICK EXTENSION
Approx.
Catalog Ø Weight
Overall Length (m)
Reference (mm)
kg lb
RC403-0378 1.83 2.60 5.73

32
RC403-0377 1.22 1.22 2.00
WIRE-HOLDING STICK
It is designed for hot-stick work to hold and position conductive cables and
jumpers (mainly during sectioning operations), as well as to undo
conductor laces in pin insulators.
The lever on the bottom of the pole is responsible for locking the
conductor in the jaw. The knurled nut is designed to pre-adjust the opening
of the upper head jaw according to the driver size. The two screws with
knurled head are designed for locking the lever after mounting to the
conductor.
The conductor clamp head can be preset in three positions (left, center and
right), so the electrician can maneuver the conductor from favorable
working angles. Its opening is designed to handle 6 AWG solid copper
cables (Ø 4 mm) and even 1590 MCM ACSR aluminum cables (Ø 38 mm).
WIRE-HOLDING STICK
Conductor Ø Approx.
Dimensions
Catalog (mm) Weight
Reference
Ø Insulating Overall Length
Minimum Maximum kg lb
(mm) Length (m) (m)
RC403-3068 1.45 1.98 3.30 7.28

32 4 38
RC403-3069 1.89 2.58 3.70 8.16
HAND STICKS AND

TIE STICKS
It has a variety of heads for different applications or even personal
preferences of each electrician.
Hook poles (rotary or fixed) are suitable for doing and undoing laces using
the eyes at their ends.
B
The swivel blade pole is used to do and undo laces without eyes at their
ends.
TIE STICKS
Swivel Hook
Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference Insulating Total
Ø
Length Length kg lb
(mm)
(m) (m)
With swivel hook and

RH1855-25 2.48 1.90 4.19
rotary blade
32 2.36
With swivel blade and Swivel blade
RH1855-26 2.51 1.90 4.19
universal head
INSULATING GRIP POLE

Designed to hold pliers or other hand tools so they can be used in hot-stick
work.
They are available in two versions: including pliers or only the pair of grip
poles.
These poles have a head to couple pliers or other compatible tool.
INSULATING GRIP POLE

RH1861-1
Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference Insulating
Ø
Length kg lb
(mm)
(m)
RH1861-1 Grip pole with pliers 2.00 4.41

32 1.18
RH1861-2 Grip pole only (pair) 1.80 3.97
RH1861-2
HAND STICKS AND

ALL-ANGLE COG WRENCH
The swivel gear mechanism of the all-angle cog wrench allows the
electrician to adjust the proper angle for socket placement and nut
positioning in hot-stick operations.
B The fiberglass pole installed parallel to the tube, attached to the handle, is
responsible for stabilizing the gear head, keeping it aligned, even when
rotating the pole.
The gear is complemented by a 1/2” square fitting to connect with the
sockets that will operate the nuts.
The gear angle can be pre-adjusted up to 140° in relation to the pole using
the two wing nuts on the head.
RC403-0184 The gear mounting head is made of bronze alloy and the gears are made of
special heat-treated steel. This versatile hardware set is installed in the
RITZGLAS® tube to ensure the required safety clearance and insulation.
WARNING
This pole is mechanically sized for nut adjustment only, with a maximum
torque of 2.0 daN.m (15 ft-lb).
It must be tighten with the proper torque using the flexible socket pole.
ALL-ANGLE COG WRENCH

Dimensions
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Insulating
Reference Ø Total Length
Length
(mm) (m)
(m) kg lb
RC403-0184 0.80 1.83 2.40 5.29
RC403-0185 1.41 2.44 2.90 6.39

38
RC403-0186 1.98 3.05 3.40 7.80
FLV01121-4 2.50 3.67 4.20 9.25
Insulating Length
HAND STICKS AND

FLEXIBLE INSULATED WRENCHES
It has a device to receive tools to tighten nuts in energized equipment.
The flexible socket installed on the pole gives the electrician increased
flexibility when using this tool, especially at steeper angles. The male-type
fixed socket at one end of the RH1891-2 and RH1891-3 poles allows the
B
ratchet wrench (R066780) to be coupled for easy application of the
required tightening torque.
The universal head installed at one end of the RH1891-6 pole allows
universal tools to be coupled.
Max. torque: 5.5 daN.m (40 ft -1 lb)
The RC403-2136 flexible insulated wrench has a female-type fitting at one
end (which allows a R066780 wrench to be adapted) and a 1/2” male
fitting at the other. With this, this tool is very versatile by allowing
interchanging between two types of socket.
Max. torque: 10 daN.m (75 ft -1 lb)
FLEXIBLE INSULATED WRENCHES

Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Pole with
Reference
Ø Insulating
kg lb
(mm) Length (m)
Female-type flexible socket and

RC403-2136 2.36 2.30 5.07
fixed socket
Male-type flexible socket and

RH1891-2 1.75 2.20 4.85
fixed socket
38
Male-type flexible socket and
RH1891-3 2.36 2.60 5.73
fixed socket
Flexible socket and universal

RH1891-6 2.36 2.70 5.95
head RH1891-2
HAND STICKS AND

ACESSORIES
The hexagonal socket set consists of 11 units measured in inches or 10
units measured with the metric system and is intended to be tightened with
the flexible wrench in hot line work.
Its square female socket can be adapted to many other hand socket
B wrenches or insulating socket poles.
Hex sockets are supplied in a case and arranged in measures in an orderly
manner for easy selection.
ACCESSORY
RC403-1085M
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
R066780 1/2” male and female manual ratchet socket wrench 0.50 1.10
Set with 11 long steel sockets, measuring:

RC403-1085 ½”, 9/16”, 5/8”, 11/16”, 3/4”, 13/16”, 7/8”,15/16”,1”, 2.16 4.76
1.1/16”, 1.1/8” with case
Set with 10 long steel sockets, measuring:

RC403-1085M 10 mm, 11 mm, 12 mm, 13 mm, 14 mm, 15 mm, 16 mm,17 2.40 5.29
mm, 18 mm, 19 mm, with case
R066780
With the removal of the ½” square insert,
this tool becomes a female-type model
HAND STICKS AND

VOLT-AMMETER STICK
It has a head at its end that can be adjusted to be coupled to different
clamp volt-ammeter models, provided their triggers are on their left side.
The head is plastic-coated to better accommodate the instrument and
prevent surface damage. Once coupled to the pole, the clamp voltmeter is
B
activated by a lever on its grip so it can be safely used due to the insulation
of the RITZGLAS® tube and tie rod.
In addition to one piece volt-ammeter poles, we have two folding models A B
with the same function and also efficiency as they are easy to carry.
VOLT-AMMETER STICK
Dimensions
Approx.
Catalog Instrument Weight
Insulating Total
Reference Ø Folded (mm)
Length Length
(mm) (m)
(m) (m)
A B kg lb
RH1968-8 2.41 - 2.51 2.35 5.18

38 23
32 to to
115 60
RH1978-8* 2.41 1.25 2.51 2.80 6.17
* Folding
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL POLES
It consists of a universal head (toothed) for easy, fast, and safe coupling of
all universal tools, mounted with a thumbscrew, which comes with the
stick. This enables the electrician to place the universal tool at angles of up
B to 90° to the pole.
Depending on the configuration of the universal tool, a universal adapter
(RM4455-84) can be installed between the pole and the tool to obtain any
desired angle.
The universal stick, with attached rubber drip skirt, is designed for
emergency wet operations (rubber drip skirts provide additional flow
distance and change the water course to prevent it from dripping down the
stick).
The rigid splice provides a convenient way of transport while maintaining
Rigid splice
proper lengths for the tasks to be performed.
All models have a rest strap (RH1760-5).
Please note that the bags for storage and carrying all universal sticks can
be purchased separately.
UNIVERSAL POLES
Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Description
Ø
Length kg lb
(mm)
(m)
RH1760 With 1 head at one end, rubber base at the other and lace hook 32 2.40 1.75 3.86
RH1760-1 With 1 head on one end and rubber base on the other 32 1.79 1.30 2.87
2 pole sections interconnected by a rigid splice, 1 universal head at one end,

RH1760-2 32 2.29 2.10 4.63
rubber base at the other and lace hook
RH1760-3 With 2 heads (1 at each end) and lace hook 32 1.76 1.70 3.75
RH1760-4 With 2 heads (1 at each end) and lace hook 32 2.37 2.00 4.41
Sectional, 2 pole sections interconnected by a rigid seam, universal heads at

RH1760-6 32 2.25 2.40 5.29
the ends and lace hook
RH1760-10 With 2 heads (1 at each end) 32 2.98 2.20 4.85
Continues on next page 4
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL POLES
Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Description
Ø
(mm)
Length
(m)
kg lb
B
RH1761 With 1 head at one end, rubber base at the other and 2 rubber drip skirts 32 2.40 1.60 3.53
RH1761-1 With 1 head at one end, rubber base at the other and 3 rubber drip skirts 32 2.40 1.70 3.75
RH1770 Folding, with 1 head at one end and rubber base at the other 32 2.30 2.00 4.41
Sectional, where:
1 3m pole section 32
RT403-0752 1 3m pole section 38 5.93 4.75 10.47
It contains 1 rigid splice at its center, 1 32mm universal head at its end and a
rubber base in the 38mm section
TOOL RACK AND CROSSARM TOOL HANGER

The pole hanger is a very useful tool in the working area of electrician to
rest poles in operation.
It is adjustable on crossarms, ranging in width from 95 to 114 mm
(crossarm height is not important).
The paired pole rack is an alternative or complement for the canvas to
arrange selected and properly prepared insulating poles in the workplace,
thus avoiding their contamination from contact with the ground.
The twelve support rods and center mast are coated with plastic material RM1860
to protect the poles from abrasion and have a capacity of 12 poles up to Ø
76 mm.
Tripod shoes are fully retractable for easy transport and storage of the rack.
TOOL RACK AND CROSSARM TOOL HANGER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RM1860 Tool hanger 0.95 2.09
RM4660 One Tool rack 3.70 8.16
RM4660-E1 Two Tool racks 4.40 16.32

RM4660
HAND STICKS AND

UNIVERSAL TOOLS
The universal tool series in this section has been carefully selected for
interventions in energized installations using the universal insulating pole.
These tools are equipped with “toothed” universal heads for their perfect
B coupling with a universal pole, for hot-stick operations with absolute
precision.
Each universal tool has its own properties and its main purpose is to
replace manual operation, even if the work angles or positions are
unfavorable.
- RC403-0005
Cotter pin remover.
It is used in disc insulator decoupling to displace the cotter pin when its
eye is in the opposite direction of the structure.
Approx. weight 0.38 kg (0.84 lb)
RC403-0005
- RC403-0006
Cotter positioner.
It is used in disc insulator couplings to insert the cotter pin in its locking
position when its eye is in the opposite direction of the structure.
RC403-0006 - RC403-0011
Knocker.
Due to the impact caused by its coil spring, this tool is designed for easy
extraction of cotter pins when used in with cotter pullers, especially in tight
spaces and adverse conditions.
RC403-0011 - RM4455-87
Ball socket adjuster
Designed to position the insulator ball socket during installation or removal.
It is also used as an auxiliary tool during cradle installation in “V” chains
and when installing tensioner poles.
- RC403-0126
RM4455-87
Ball socket adjuster
Similar to the RM4455-87 ball socket adjuster, this tool is designed to
handle objects up to Ø 69 mm.
RC403-0126
HAND STICKS AND

- RC403-0175
Ball socket adjuster (plastic coated)
The plastic coating prevents damage to disc insulators or poles during
handling.
Approx. weight 0.35 kg (0.77 lb) RC403-0175
B
- RC403-0177
All-angle pliers.
Designed to hold nuts, fittings, or any other moving parts during
intervention. Its wing nut allows pre-adjustment of the best desired angle.
RC403-0177
- ATR10994-1
Multi-angled tongs with double jaw.
Approx. weight 1.00 kg (2.20 lb).
It has the same application as RC403-0177, but it has a double jaw)
- RC403-0314 ATR10994-1
Conductor sander.
Designed to clean the live conductor surfaces before installing grounding
connectors or clamps, especially in oxidized copper conductors where
cleaning by other methods is difficult.
- RC403-1416
Tie wire claw. RC403-0314
Hand-shaped, acts as tweezers to manipulate wires or preformed wires

during their installation on the conductor.
- RC403-1417
RC403-1416
Utility-head.
Designed for different interruptions in energized installations, such as:
installing or removing blocks, nylon straps, switches, etc.
- RM4455-2
Pin holder. RC403-1417
Designed for the placement and removal of pins in insulator chains through
its blade, which holds the pin holder head firmly up to Ø 15 mm during
handling.
RM4455-2
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-5
Cut-Out Tool.
Designed for handling the corona ring through its vice-type shape with
plasticized hooks.
Max. aperture 75 mm | Ø max. 45 mm
B RM4455-5 Approx. weight 0.78 kg (1.72 lb)
- RM4455-6
Ratchet wrench.
Designed for the handling of bolts and nuts in energized installations
through interchanging sockets. Equipped with a universal rotating screw at
its end, it can be used with universal poles.
RM4455-6
- RM4455-9 - VMR01479-2
Disconnect.
Special head designed for opening or closing disconnect or fuse switches.
Made of aluminum alloy (RM4455-9) and bronze alloy (VMR01479-2)
Approx. weight 0.06 kg (1.46 lb) 0.17 kg (0.37 lb)
RM4455-9 - RM4455-10
Chuck Blank.
Designed to allow the installation of various tools through their welded
fixings, making them universal for various interventions in energized
installations.
RM4455-10 - RC403-0834 - RC403-1071

Preform wire applicator
Specially developed for installation or removal of preform wire or lace on
live conductors offering rotation control, which is difficult with other tools.
Due to its small size, the RC403-1071 is recommended for top lacing
work.
Weight approx. 0.10 kg (0.22 lb)
Catalog ØA ØB
Reference (mm) (mm)
A
RC403-0834 27 44.5
RC403-0834
RC403-1071 35 76
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-12
Ball Socket Adjuster.
Spring-action tool designed to remove cotter pins from insulators in
energized installations when its head is directed towards the structure.
RM4455-12 B
- RM4455-13
Snapout Disconnect.
Spring-loaded action tool designed to open stuck disconnect or fuse
switches.
RM4455-13
- RM4455-15
Locating Pin.
It is used for easy introduction of pins and screws into metal structure
fittings and insulator chains when the holes in these fittings need to be
aligned.
RM4455-15
- RM4455-17
Fixed Prong Tie Stick Head.
Designed for safe operations while performing wire lacings, preventing the
end of the wire loop from coming loose and contacting the crossarm.
- RM4455-18 RM4455-17
Cotter Key Installing Tool.

Designed for pin or hardware replacement through its clamps, which hold
them tightly when they are out of reach of the electrician.
- RM4455-19 RM4455-18
Cotter Key Pusher.

Designed to couple and uncouple insulators.
The straight end allows the cotter pin to move from the inner shell housing,
while the curved portion is used to push the cotter pin back into the
housing.
- RM4455-22 RM4455-19
Ball Socket Adjuster.

Shaped like a hook, it is designed to manipulate the socket position during
the cotter pin installation or removal.
RM4455-22
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-23
Hack Saw.
Designed to cut components close to the live conductor, even at
unfavorable angles.
RM4455-23 Approx. weight 0.42 kg (0.93 lb)
B
- RM4455-26A
Pruning Saws.
Designed to saw tree branches near energized installations.
RM4455-26A
- RM4455-66
Saw handle.
This tool acts as a handle for the pruning saw RM4455- 26A, for rubber
glove work.
RM4455-66
- RM4455-28
Screwdriver.
Designed for the installation and removal of slotted head screws in
energized installations.
RM4455-28
- RM4455-29B
Head for clamps up to 152 mm.
Designed for the installation and removal of eyescrew clamps in energized
or non-energized installations.
RM4455-29B
- RM4455-36
Link Stick Head.
it is designed to hold light components or conductors during interventions
in energized installations. It has an aperture capacity of 6 to 19 mm. Body
edges are rounded to prevent damage to conductors.
RM4455-36
- RM4455-37
Chuck Blank.
Designed for the coupling of various tools, with a firm attachment through
a wing nut, making them a universal tool for the different energized
interventions.
RM4455-37
- RM4455-38
Mirror.
Designed for inspections in energized installations not directly visible. The
angle of the concave mirror can be preset, to give the electrician a better
working position.
RM4455-38
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-39
Shepherd Hook.
For handling and lifting insulator chains. Its articulation is designed to
maintain alignment with the insulator at all times.
It is also used as a support during interventions in energized installations,
such as: pole or yoke installations. RM4455-39 B
- RM4455-40
Fixed Blade Tie Stick Head.
It has a blade with a 60° tilt in relation to the pole, for lace wire handling.
Provided with deep V-shaped for easy wire extraction, even in hard to RM4455-40
reach places.
- RM4455-46
Flexible Wrench Head.
Designed for fitting to 1/2” standard sockets when installing or removing
bolts or nuts. RM4455-46
- RM4455-50
Skinning Knife.
Allows cutting objects or removing conductor insulation in energized
installations. RM4455-50
- RM4455-63 - RM1889
Conductor Cleaning Brush.
It has steel bristles for excellent pressure around the conductor during
cleaning. Available in models RM4455-63, with a universal socket for
coupling to a universal stick, and RM1889, with a grip for manual use RM4455-63
(when used with rubber insulating gloves). Steel bristles may be purchased
for replacement in packages with 10 units: (RM1899).
- RH4455-64
Extension with drip skirts.
RM1889
This tool is designed for coupling on insulating poles for use in emergency
situations under rain.
- RM4455-67 - RT403-1101
Insulator Forks. RH4455-64
Designed to hold the insulator during its installation or removal.
With a pre-set angle on the wing nut, and by turning the screw, the fiber
jaws are adjusted from 76 to 108 mm
(3” to 4-1/4”) on model RM4455-67, and 57 to 89 mm (2 1/4” to 3-1/2”)
on model RT403-1101.
RM4455-67
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-69
Rotary Prong Tie Stick Head.
It has free swivel hook at its ends to do and undo laces.
B RM4455-69 - RM4455-70
Rotary Prong Tie Stick Head.
A tool with a V-shaped steel blade and free swivel on its axis.
It is used to undo laces without eye at its end.
RM4455-70 - RM4455-71
Pointed Disconnect.
A head used for circuit breaker switch operation.
- RM4455-72
RM4455-71
Conductor Gauge.
It is designed for fast and accurate gauge measurement of ACSR, solid or
multi-stranded copper conductors, for 4 Cu up to 4/0 ACSR.
RM4455-72 - RM4455-77
Fuse Puller.
With universal fit, it is designed to install, mobilize, or remove Ø 13 to 38 mm
fuse switch cartridges in energized installations by rotating the universal pole.
The cartridge puller angle can be pre-set using the wing nut.
- RM4455-78
Fuse Puller.
RM4455-77
Similar in application to model RM4455-77, this tool has an aperture
capacity of 25 to 64 mm.
- FLV03811-3
Fuse Puller
Designed to install, mobilize, or remove Ø 30 to 90 mm fuse switch
cartridges in energized installations by rotating the universal pole.
RM4455-78
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-79
Spiral Disconnect.
It is designed for several tasks, such as:
- opening yoke locks to release trunnions or adjustable sleeves on
tensioning poles;
B
- assisting in installing energized side yokes; RM4455-79
- cable tensioner mounting and removal.
- RM4455-80
Tree and Rope Hook.
Designed for pushing/pulling tree branches out of the work area near
energized installations or to untangle ropes.
RM4455-80
- RM4455-82
All Purposes Cotter Key Tool.
Specially designed for installing and extracting cotter pins in insulator
anchor chains.
It has guiding slots for the cotter pin during mounting.
RM4455-82
- RM4455-84
Universal adapter.
It is provided with a thumbscrew to couple to a universal head, allowing the
change of the installation angle of a tool.
Approx. weight 0.11 kg (0.24 lb) RM4455-84
- RM4455-85
Hammer.
Designed for you to strike hard in energized installations to move them.
RM4455-85
- RM4455-86
Vise Grips Holder.
Designed to be a temporary anchor for the ends of cut conductors during
maintenance to prevent them from becoming loose.
RM4455-86
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-88
Bolt Head Wrench.
It acts as a fixed wrench for Ø 3/4” and 5/8” bolts, preventing them from
turning when the nut is moved with the RM4455-89 ratchet wrench and
RC403-1085 and RC403-1085M multi-angle sockets.
B RM4455-88 Approx. weight 0.42 kg (0.93 lb)
- RM4455-89
Ratchet Wrench.
Designed to tighten 5/8” square nuts on energized installations hardware,
regardless of thread length.
RM4455-89 Approx. weight 1.19 kg (2.62 lb)
- RM4455-92
It has a semitubular shape with Ø 64 mm external length and a swivel head
with universal fit for use for coupling to universal poles. Designed to clean
the whole circumference of an energized conductor.
RM4455-92 - RM4455-93
Similar to model RM4455-92 (Ø 64 mm), for manual use with the aid of
insulating gloves for increased safety.
- RC403-0320 - RC403-0450
RM4455-93 (Ø 64 mm external) (Ø 76 mm external)
Also similar to the RM4455-92 model, it has a plastic coated steel handle
for better grip for electricians, who should wear insulating gloves during
handling.
- RM4455-96
Cotter key Puller
RC403-0450
It is designed for easy partial extraction of the cotter pin through its “petal”
shape that, by moving the lever, gently extracts the cotter pin that is
perpendicular to the structure.
RM4455-96 - RM4455-97
Tool for “W” keys
Designed for replacement of W-type cotter pins (commonly used in Europe
and Japan) using its slot.
RM4455-97
HAND STICKS AND

- RM4455-100
Flexible Universal Adapter.
This tool is designed to rotate another universal tool in series with it, even
at an angle when coupled to a universal pole or hot stick.
RM4455-100 B
- RM4455-102
Pin Installer.
This tool allows the placement of pins in insulator chains through its three
tightly grasping clamps.
RM4455-102
- RM4455-103
Cotter Key Installing Tool.
This tool is designed for the installation of angled cotter pins in the
insulator chains through its multi-snap device.
Approx. weight 0.26 kg (0.57 lb) RM4455-103
- FLV16148-1
Universal Hook.
This tool is designed for handling objects up to Ø 64 mm.
FLV16148-1
- FLV16165-1
Universal Extension Device.
This tool is designed for the extension, in certain cases, of other universal
tools in hard to reach places.
FLV16165-1
- FLV16159-1
Rubber Coated Hammer.
Designed to strike equipment in energized installations to move them.
FLV16159-1
- FLV11042-1
Boat-hook Tool.
Used by firefighters to break glass, roofs, etc. to clear places that need to
be accessed, such as buildings, homes, sheds after a fire, reducing
accidents.
- FLV29611-1 FLV11042-1
Spacer mounting head.

A tool with a toothed universal head designed for hot-stick work with
absolute precision. It has cast aluminum body with a red plastisol coated
section, in order to improve distance visibility of the tool.
FLV29611-1
HAND STICKS AND

LEVER TYPE WIRE CUTTERS
Designed to cut ACSR, ASC, and copper aluminum cables, made with
RITZGLAS® insulating tube.
The hinged handle cutter (FLV02818-1) is only used for lower effort cuts
B and is exclusive for rubber glove work interventions.
Lever models have reinforced fiberglass poles that drive the blades.
The lever is plastic coated and driving it gives the electrician additional
mechanical force when cutting conductors in the sizes indicated in the
table.
HINGED-TYPE LEVER CUTTER

Dimensions Approx. Weight
Maximum
Catalog
Conductor
Size kg lb
(mm) (m)
FLV02818-1
FLV02818-1 1/0 CAA Ø 10.11 mm 32 0.76 2.50 5.51
SIMPLE HANDLE CUTTER

Dimensions Approx. Weight
Maximum
Catalog
Conductor
Size kg lb
(mm) (m)
556 MCM CAA (ACSR)

FLV19245-1 38 0.81 2.60 5.70
Ø 23.5 mm
FLV19245-1
HAND STICKS AND

LEVER TYPE WIRE CUTTERS
Approx.
Pole Dimensions
Maximum Weight
Catalog
Conductor
Size Ø
Length Length kg lb
(mm)
(m) (m) B
1/0 CAA (ACSR)
RH1871-4 32 0.71 1.45 3.45 7.50
Ø 10.11 mm
1/0 CAA
RH1871-6 32 1.16 2.00 4.00 8.82
Ø 10.11 mm
4/0 CAA
RH1873-4 38 0.71 1.45 5.40 11.90
Ø 14.31 mm
4/0 CAA (ACSR)

RH1873-6 38 1.16 2.00 6.00 13.20
Ø 14.31 mm
336,8 MCM CAA

RH1875-4 38 0.71 1.45 6.00 13.20
Ø 18.83 mm
336,8 MCM CAA

RH1875-6 38 1.16 2.00 6.80 15.00
Ø 18.83 mm
Insulating Length
RATCHET CABLE CUTTERS

Approx.
Pole Dimensions
Maximum Weight
Catalog
Conductor
Size Ø
Length Length kg lb
(mm)
(m) (m)
556 MCM CAA

RC403-1382 38 0.79 1.97 5.20 11.46
Ø 23.5 mm
556 MCM CAA

RC403-1384 38 1.40 2.58 5.50 12.13
Ø 23.5 mm
Insulating Length
The construction of these cutters, with plastic caster system, provides a

smooth sliding mechanism over the RITZGLAS® tube and reinforced
fiberglass rods.
HAND STICKS AND

TREE TRIMMERS
It is designed to cut tree branches, especially in the vicinity of electrical
installations, when branches obstruct interventions or compromise
operation and safety.
B The fixed and movable blade is made of forged steel and is sharp.
The pulley system, giving the operator a 3 x 1 mechanical advantage
(for example: a 4.5 daN (10 lb) force on the rope) will represent a
13.5 daN (30 lb) force on the blades.
Pulleys were adopted to reduce operating effort.
The handle (Ø 1/4”) of the tree trimmer is 7.60 m long.
The RH2106-4 is designed to be coupled to complementary poles using a
universal head.
The tree trimming also has a universal slot close to the blade for mounting
a branch pruning saw.
Work length
TREE TRIMMERS
Approx.
Dimensions
Weight
Catalog
Pole with
Reference
Ø Working
kg lb
(mm) length (m)
Branch pruner with universal

RH2106-4 32 0.66 1.70 3.75
head
ACESSÓRIO
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RM4455-26A Branch pruning saw 0.36 0,80
UNIVERSAL TOOL HEAD FOR CUTTING WIRES

It is used to shut off power of consumers in default when the power meter
is not accessible. It can also be attached to the hot stick without requiring
ladders.
This head has a 15 mm opening, to cut conductors up to 35 mm² (2 AWG).
UNIVERSAL TOOL HEAD FOR CUTTING WIRE

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV17844-1 Universal tool head for cutting wires 0.30 0.66
HAND STICKS AND

KITE BUSTER TOOL
Practical for the removal of kites and intertwined wires in the electric
networks, especially in urban areas, situations that cause serious risks to
system operation and negatively affects the visual aspect.
This tool is used at the end of the hot stick through by connecting it to the
B
universal head.
It was built with Ø 25 mm x 300 mm RITZGLAS® tube in total length and
has steel cross pins in its body to tie the wires attached to the power grid.
The upper end of this tool can be coupled with other head models for
cutting and removing objects from electrical networks.
KITE BUSTER TOOL AND ACCESSORY

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV13907-1 Kite buster tool 0.31 0.68

FLV13907-1
The universal flange head (FLV09311-1) has a bronze alloy universal head
and a sharp steel blade, with one blade edge at the top and the other at the
bottom.
The universal sharp blade head (FLV13905-1) has its own characteristics
for cutting and removing objects from the network. Made with universal
bronze alloy head and “U” shaped blade, the blade edge internal for easy
cutting.
ACCESSORY
FLV09311-1
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV09311-1 Flange Universal Head 0.11 0.24
FLV13905-1 Universal Head with blade 0.11 0.24
FLV13905-1
HAND STICKS AND

RESCUE HOOK
Designed for electrical accident rescue in installations up to 34.5 kV, this
pole with anatomically designed hooks ensures the required safety
clearance and insulation, making emergency and adverse interventions
B practical, quick, and safe..
It is built with a RITZGLAS® tube, the same used in hot line maintenance
tools. It has decreased weight, high mechanical strength, and excellent
dielectric strength, essential characteristics for easy handling and total
Arm, leg, or feet pulling hook
safety.
The RITZGLAS® Rescue Stick should only be used to move the victim
away from energized points. Removing the victim should be sufficient for
safe first aid.
RESCUE HOOK
Length Approx.
Rated Work Capacity
Catalog Ø (m) Weight
Reference (mm)
daN lb Total kg lb
Body pulling hook

FLV09429-1 32 200 440 2.28 2.30 5.07
0.33 m
0.14 m
Total Length
HAND STICKS AND

MEASURING STICK AND EXTENSION
Designed to measure lengths and gaps up to 3 m in energized systems
when minimum recommended safety distances cannot be maintained.
It comprises of RITZGLAS® insulating poles with alternating 10 cm
markings, in orange and black colors, hooks, and universal connections
B
made of aluminum and bronze alloy.
It has a versatile design, enabling measurements at angles.
Easy to handle, it can be used with the rubber glove method or with a hot
stick connected to its universal head.
For measurements of lengths over 3 m, the FLV16146-1 extension must be
coupled to the set.
MEASURING STICK AND EXTENSION

Approx.
Catalog Ø Total Length Weight
Description
Reference (mm) (m)
kg lb
FLV16140-1 Measuring stick 9.50 3.00 0.80 1.76
FLV16146-1 Extension 16.00 2.00 1.00 2.20
FLV16140-1
FLV16146-1
HAND STICKS AND

B
HAND STICKS AND

GROUP C
CONDUCTOR SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
Wire Tongs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 065 Distribution Strain Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . 092
Wire Tong Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 069 Light-weight Strain Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . 094
Wire Tong Blocks Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 070 Sectional Strain Pole

(with Splice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 098
Wire Tong Swivel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 071
Accessories for Strain Carrier . . . . . . . . . 099
Saddle and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072
Strain Pole
Tower Type Saddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076 Clevis-Eye / Clevis-Clevis . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Dual Auxiliary Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 077 Hot Stick Tension Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Auxiliary Crossarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 080 Auxiliary Strain Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Extension Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 081 Heavy-Duty Suspension Link Stick . . . . . . 104
Auxiliary Crossarm Support for Adjustable Hook Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Aerial Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 082
Suspension Pole with
Temporary Conductor Support . . . . . . . . 083 Adjustable Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Strain Link Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 085 Yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Spiral Link Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 087 Static Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Roller Link Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 088 Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Adjustable Strain Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 089 “J”- Hook Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Two-Pole Strain Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 091 Trolley Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

GROUP C
C
CONDUCTOR SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
WIRE TONGS
It is generally used to hold and move energized conductors from their
original positions. It allows electricians to service crossarms, insulators,
removing and placement of poles and hardware, as well as mounting new
components, such as lightning arresters, in overhead lines.
This stick is usually operated in pairs or with other complementary tools
such as: saddles; necklaces; collars; blocks. All are specially designed for
quick and safe service.
Constructed with RITZGLAS® tube and aluminum alloy fittings (for better
mechanical strength and lightness ratio), the steel swivel eye has a bearing
for smooth and perfect rotation.
The varying wire tong jaw opening allows the conductor to be firmly and
securely fixed by rotating the bar until the jaw is fully closed.
CONDUCTOR SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 065 TEREX RITZ

Insulating Length
WIRE TONGS
C Insulating
Conductor
Ø
Rated Work
Capacity
Approx.
Catalog Ø Weight
Length (mm) (traction)
Reference (mm)
(m)
Min. Max. daN lb kg lb
RH4645-6 38 1.74 340 750 3.30 7.28
RH4645-8 38 2.35 340 750 3.80 8.38
RH4645-10 38 2.96 340 750 4.20 9.26
RH4646-6 51 1.70 454 1000 4.60 10.14
RH4646-8 51 2.33 454 1000 5.30 11.68
RH4646-10 51 2.92 454 1000 6.00 13.23
RH4646-12 51 3.53 454 1000 7.50 16.53

4.10 57.00
RH4647-8 64 2.29 567 1250 7.30 16.09
RH4647-10 64 2.90 567 1250 8.40 18.52
RH4647-12 64 3.51 567 1250 9.40 20.72
RH4647-14 64 4.12 567 1250 10.40 22.93
RH4647-16* 64 4.73 567 1250 13.90 30.64
RC400-0171 76 3.47 680 1500 12.70 28.00
RC400-0172 76 4.08 680 1500 14.90 32.85
* Take-apart stick
The RH4647-16 can be taken apart, making it easy to carry.

The connection between the two parts is made through a metal splice, of
galvanized and fixed steel, with steel pin and pin type cotter pin.
TEREX RITZ 066 CONDUCTOR SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

The diagrams show correct orientation of the use of the wire tongs through
the four most used configurations and their workloads.
The electrician must strictly observe the safety distances when using the
hot line poles, according to their recommended voltages in the table at the
beginning of this catalog.
Fig. 1 - Wire tong with saddle, wire tong blocks clamp, and conductor
pulling blocks.
Fig. 2 - Wire tongs with saddles, wire tong band, and conductor pulling C
block.
B B
m
m
2
76
A
Block
Load Block collar
Fig.1 Fig. 2
WORKING LOADS*
Maximum Conductor Size and Span
RITZGLAS® Pole Dimensions Max. Workload (m)
Figure Ø (mm) / Length (m) (per Conductor)
Support Type ACSR Copper
Nº
A B daN lb Size Span Size Span
51 x 3.55 125 276 213 91

1 38 x 2.96 Pole saddle and lift saddle 4/0 4/0
64 x 3.51 215 474 366 152
51 x 3.55 125 276 213 91

2 38 x 2.96 Pole saddle and lift saddle 4/0 4/0
64 x 3.51 215 474 366 152
* Based on a fully horizontal wire tong. The lower the upper saddle is placed, below the conductor's level, the higher the tension on pole “A” will be,
so the load it can support will be lower

Fig. 3 - Wire tongs, lift saddle, tourniquet pull pole and block used to pull
heavy conductors.
Fig. 4 - Set for lifting the three phases where all three conductors are
raised simultaneously.
1520 mm
C
B
610 mm
A
B C
1830 mm
Load
Fig.3 Fig. 4
WORKING LOADS
Maximum Conductor Size and Span
RITZGLAS® Pole Dimensions Max. Workload (m)
Figura Ø (mm) / Length (m) (per Conductor)
Support Type ACSR Coppe
Nº
A B C daN lb Size Span Size Span
51 x 3.55 160 353 4/0 259 4/0 114

3 38 - Lift Saddle
64 x 3.51 454 1000 397.5 350 250 259
4 64 x 3.51 51 x 2.33 51 x 2.33 Pole Saddles 102 225* 4/0 168 4/0 70
* With maximum lift of 1.52m above the saddle and maximum unbalance of 102 daN/225 lb on one side.
WARNING
WORKLOADS - For the correct selection of tools, the loading information
of the structure must be used. When these values cannot be obtained, the
whole work structure must be analyzed before the load is applied.
When calculations are not possible (e.g. when a pole is slightly larger than
its adjacent pole) just consider the total weight of the adjacent spans as
the maximum workload. This does not apply to structures installed at high
points, which requires special analysis for load determination.
If the workload is higher than indicated in the table (for a specified pole),
use two wire tongs with double lift saddle or use a larger Ø wire tong.

WIRE TONG BAND
They are installed in the wire tong to be used as a pulling point in the
block, for the articulation of these poles during the removal and
subsequent approach of the conductor.
To ensure effective insulation between the block and live conductors, the
collar must be installed on the pole at a minimum distance according to its
voltage class or more.
This tool is built in four different diameters, with a ring for direct contact
C
with the pole and in aluminum alloy for the free rotation of the pole, once
mounted to it, through two screws. The lifting eye is made of bronze alloy
and has a pivot to follow the pull tool to the pole.
WIRE TONG BAND

Approx.
Load Capacity
Catalog Ø Weight
Reference (mm)
daN lb kg lb
RM1729 51 0.61 1.34
RM1729-1 64 0.65 1.43

Block
680 1500 collar
RM1729-2 76 0.70 1.54
RM1729-3 38 0.33 0.73

WIRE TONG BLOCKS CLAMP
Designed as a mounting point for wire tong pulling, with the aid of a block,
which is connected to the block clamp eye. This arrangement aligns the
pulling forces with the wire tong, helping to lift heavy conductors back to
their original position.
The collar is made of aluminum alloy, whose ring is the tightening screw
and with a wing nut in bronze alloy.
C The inner walls of the collar are lined with a stainless steel blade,
protecting the surface of the pole from mechanical damage.
The collar consists of two halves, which are open for coupling and
mounting to the pole by tightening the wing nut installed on one of the
collar tabs.
The wing nut device has a spring for easy, quick, and safe collar operation.
WIRE TONG BLOCKS CLAMP

Rated Work Approx.
Catalog Ø Capacity Weight
Wire tong Reference (mm)
block Ring daN lb kg lb
RM4743 38 1.10 2.43
RM4743-1 51 560 1235 1.20 2.65
RM4743-2 64 1.20 2.87

WIRE TONG SWIVEL
An important tool in the arrangement of two wire tongs for conductor
movement.
It is installed on the body of the wire tong head, which is coupled to the
conductor. The other wire tong is attached to the collar strap, forming a
pivoting assembly. Thus, the collar prevents two wire tongs, connected on
the same conductor cable, from twisting or even breaking it.
This tool is built in two diameters, the ring is made for direct contact with
C
the pole and in aluminum alloy for the free rotation of the pole, once
mounted to it, through 04 screws/nuts.
The circular handles are made of bronze alloy and the shackle is made of
aluminum alloy, which are interconnected with a steel screw to follow the
joints of the poles.
WIRE TONG SWIVEL

Rated Work Approx.
Reference (mm)
daN lb kg lb
RM4745 51 0.90 1.98

680 1500
RM4745-1 64 0.98 2.16

SADDLES AND COMPONENTS
This tool is used as a coupling point for poles, blocks, or masts, allowing
the hot poles to move away from the utility pole. If necessary, additional
space can be obtained using the extensor (RC400-0073).
They are attached to the pole by a chain stretcher and the final adjustment
is made by its rotating handwheel.
C
Made of aluminum alloy and heat treated to meet workload requirements
and lightness in handling.
Available models include: saddles with collar; with extensor and collar;
with shackle and with extensor and shackle.
The non-extensor pole saddle has a workload capacity of up to 454 daN

(1000 lb) and, when mounting the extensor, its working capacity reduces
to up to 363 daN (800 lb).
The crossarm type saddle (RM4744) is used for reduced workspace or

RM4744 already mounted with one or more pole saddles.
The shackle installed on the saddle body, in turn, provides freedom of

movement and allows the wire tong to move freely in either direction.
It can be used on 76 x 108 mm and 102 x 203 mm crossarms with a

maximum working load of 227 daN / 500 lb.
The chain stretcher (RM1848-W) is designed for easy saddle mounting,

preventing it from slipping or excessively shifting, keeping it firmly in place.
The length of the chain stretcher can be increased by using the chain
extension (RM1847, RM1847-3, RM1847-4) for poles with larger
diameters.
And the single lift saddle (RM4760-W) is used in “H” structure or when the
work space on the pole is limited. This saddle is equipped with a handle
and pin to connect the block and wire tong, respectively, allowing free
movement of both.
RM4760-W
When two saddles are required, they can be mounted at about the same
height, one on each side.
There is also an adapter (RM4760-2), which converts a single saddle into

a double lift saddle for the mounting of two poles.
These saddles are made of lightweight, easy-to-handle, aluminum alloy.

They allow up to 527 mm elevation in the conductors and support all wire
tong models.

The RC400-1016 single lift saddle (with RITZGLAS® insulating tube) has
the same application as the aluminum alloy lift saddle, but normally used in
higher voltage systems where more room is needed to lift the conductors.
Made of 915 mm long, Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tube, with the same load

capacity as the aluminum lift saddles: 454 daN single model and 340 daN
double model.
This tool provides a total conductor lift of up to 915 mm.

C
The saddle adapter (RM4760-2) is also available for this saddle.
The rope lashing saddle (RM1846-W) is a simple and practical tool as it

prevents improper tangling of the ropes. It is attached to the pole through
the chain stretcher and has six rings where the ropes can be tied. RC400-1016
Constructed of lightweight aluminum alloy, it has 915 mm of steel string
and rated working capacity of 454 daN (1000 lb).
The eye fastener (RM4740-14) is used to attach the eye of the wire tong
base to a pole saddle when it has the dual auxiliary arm function, allowing
the pole to exert rotational movements to connect to the stirrup on the dual
auxiliary arm.
The concrete pole saddle screw (RM4740) has the same function as the
(pole) saddle, however, for exclusive use in coupling masts to the square RM1846-W
concrete pole.
Simple and practical to install, this tool is inserted into one of the holes in
the pole and fastened with a wing nut. Constructed of galvanized steel,
coupling and bronze alloy butterfly nut, it has a total length of 295 mm.
The collars are versatile and very useful for both distribution and
transmission work, as they allow the stick to be fixed in arrangements with
other tools previously installed in the structure.
They are made of two halves of aluminum alloy, with locking screw and
bronze nut.
The inner walls of the collars are lined with a stainless steel blade to
protect the pole surface from mechanical damage

SADDLE
Rated Work Approx.

Catalog Capacity Weight
Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
RM1846-W Rope tie saddle 454 1000 3.40 7.50
C
RM4740-3W Saddle with 38mm collar 454 1000 4.90 10.80
RM4740-4W Saddle with 51 mm collar 454 1000 5.00 11.02
RM4740-5W Saddle with 64 mm collar 454 1000 5.10 11.24

RM4740-5W
RM4740-10W Sela com manilha 454 1000 4.10 9.04
RM4740-15W Saddle with mounting eye 454 1000 3.40 7.50
RM4740-16W Saddle with extensor and 38 mm collar 363 800 5.40 11.90
RM4740-10W
RM4740-20W Saddle with extensor and shackle 363 800 4.60 10.15
76 x 108 to 102 x 203 mm adjustable

RM4744 227 500 2.50 5.51
opening crossarm saddle
RM4760-W Simple lift saddle 454 1000* 5.83 12.85
RM4760-1W Double lift saddle 340 750* 6.40 14.11
Single lift saddle with RITZGLAS®

RC400-1016 454* 1000* 8.50 18.70
insulating tube
* For each wire tong.

COMPONENTS
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
RC400-0073 Saddle extensor 363 800 0,50 1,10 RC400-0073

C
RM1847 457 mm chain extension 1134 2500 0,80 1,76
RM1847-3 915 mm chain extension 1134 2500 1,15 2,54
RM1847-4 1220 mm chain extension 1134 2500 1,40 3,09
RM1848-W
RM1848-W 915 mm chain stretcher 1134 2500 2,45 5,40
290 mm long concrete pole saddle

RM4740 - - 0,82 1,81
screw
RM1847
RM4740-14 Eye mounting - - 0,35 0,77
RM4741-1 38 mm collar - - 0,80 1,76
RM4741-2 51 mm collar - - 0,90 1,98
RM4740
RM4741-3 64 mm collar - - 1,00 2,20
RM4741-5 76 mm collar - - 1,08 2,38
RM4760-2 Dual lift adapter - - 0,55 1,21
RM4740-14
RM4741-3
RM4760-2

TOWER TYPE SADDLES
They are used to support the wire tong, boom, mast, block, or hoist to
move insulator strings in the metal structure.
They are firmly coupled to the flanges of the metal structure angles by bolts
and claws with wing nut.
C Common Saddles
The RM4742 has a bronze shackle installed on the saddle body, which,
through a swivel coupling, allows block anchorage.
RM4742
The RM4742-1 to RM4742-4 models have collars with varying diameters
for safe and favorable coupling to the poles at any angle.
The RT400-1413 is similar to the RM4742, only differing in claw size,
which were designed for larger corner flaps on larger metal structures.
Light Saddles
They have the same characteristics as the common saddle. However, they
are made of aluminum alloy, which makes them more practical and easier
to install.
RT400-1413
Common saddles can be completely replaced by light saddles.
19 mm 85 mm
10,5 mm
13,5 mm
6,5 mm
6,5 mm
Corner Claw Short Claw Long Claw
TOWER TYPE SADDLES
Rated Work Approx.

Catalog Connection Capacity Weight
Description Material
Reference Capacity
daN lb kg lb
RM4742 Saddle without collar bronze 5.50 12.13
RM4742-1 Saddle with 38mm collar bronze 6.25 13.78
RM4742-2 Saddle with 51 mm collar bronze 3" x 3" to 7" x 7" 454 1000 6.30 13.89
RM4742-3 Saddle with 64 mm collar bronze 6.50 14.33
Saddle without collar, with 2 small and 2 big clamping

RT400-1413 bronze 5.80 12.79
jaws

DUAL AUXILIARY ARM
It is designed for replacement of utility poles, crossarms, or insulators. Like
all RITZGLAS® tools it is lightweight and easy to assemble. In normal
constructions or eccentric crossarms this tool can be used as a side arm.
The wireholders can be moved to minimize the transposition distance of
the conductors from the insulators to this assembly as this tool is
sufficiently sized to use as a lift arm using three wire tongs.
C
NOTE
When using the dual auxiliary arm (with voltages greater than 15 kV) or
when supporting energized conductors in the rain or chance of rain,
installing insulators (RM4805-7) to the dual auxiliary arm under the
mounting wireholders is recommended to increase flow distance.
Wiping the insulating pole surface with treatment fabric (RM1904) on the
dual auxiliary arm pole is recommended when it is installed at night or
chance of rain conditions.
DUAL AUXILIARY ARM

Approx.
Insulating
Catalog Weight
Description Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
Dual auxiliary arm with 1” fork

RC400-0075 2.96 17.50 38.58
wireholder
The dual auxiliary arm consists of the following tools:

- 01 Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® pole combined with a saddle
for utility pole mounting by a chain binder;
- 03 pcs fork-type wireholder of 25.4 mm (1")
opening without insulator (RM4805-17);
- 02 wire tong stirrup (RC400-0331);
- 01 dual auxiliary arm "T" with insulator (RC400-0562)

Tools required for these types of assemblies:
SIDE ARM
- 01 wire tong RH4647-12 (A);
- 02 wire tongs RH4646-8 (B);
- 01 saddle with ext. and collar 64 mm RM4740-18W (C);
- 01 saddle with mounting eye RM4740-15W (E);
- 01 saddle with ext. and 51mm collar RM4740-17W (F);
C - 01 double block RC400-0914 (G);
- 01 collar for block RM1729-1 (H).
H F
B
A
SIMULTANEOUS LIFT OF ASSEMBLY

- 01 wire tong RH4647-12 (A);
- 02 wire tongs RH4646-8 (B);
- 02 saddles with extensor and collar, Ø 64 mm RM4740-18W (C);
- 01 64mm brace strap RM1728-5 (D)
B B

PARTS AND COMPONENTS
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RM4805-15 1” fork-type wireholder with insulator 1.35 2.98
RM4805-17 1” fork-type wireholder without insulator 0.90 1.98

RM4805-17
C
RE400-0008 1-1/2” fork-type wireholder without insulator 1.30 2.87
RE400-0009 1-1/2” fork-type wireholder with insulator 1.75 3.86
RC400-0331 Stirrup for brace (Ø 64 mm) 0.94 2.09
RM1728-5 64mm brace strap 1.50 3.31
FLV00714-2 Eye head without insulator 1.95 4.30

RE400-0008
RC400-0562 Eye head with insulator 2.40 5.29
TOOL APPLICATION
- RE400-0008 (1-1/2” without insulator) - RM4805-15 (1” without
insulator)
- RE400-0009 (1-1/2” with insulator) - RM4805-17 (1” with insulator)
These wireholders have 25.4 and 38 mm (1” and 1-1/2”) openings and a
counterbalanced device that automatically closes with conductor insertion
and must be reversed to release the conductor.
These tools, with or without insulator, also have a Ø 64 mm collar for RC400-0331
coupling to the dual auxiliary arm crossarm.
- RC400-0331 (Ø 64 mm)
An equipment that can be purchased separately as a replacement part or
to be added to existing equipment. It is designed as a coupling point for
the wire tongs used as braces of the dual auxiliary arm through its collar.
Besides being easy to install, it is made of aluminum alloy.
- RM1728-5
It is used to attach the wire tong (which stands vertically as the mast
supporting the dual auxiliary arm) to the wire tong eyes, which act as the RM1728-5
braces of the set.
Made of aluminum alloy, the two halves of the strap form one piece, joined
by two eye bolts.
Rated Work Capacity: 454 daN (1000 daN)
- RC400-0562 - FLV00714-2
It is specifically designed for use in the simultaneous lifting arrangement of
the lifting assembly.
FLV00714-2 RC400-0562

AUXILIARY CROSSARMS
The RH4862-6, RH4862-8, and RH4862-51 Auxiliary crossarms are used
for operations to replace medium voltage overhead short span insulators or
utility poles up to 15 kV phase/phase. It must be complemented with two
saddles (RM4740-5W) to install the auxiliary crossarm mast to the pole.
Saddles must be purchased separately.
It has a load capacity of 272 daN (600 lb), with four conductors in balance
C and 68 daN (150 lb), in each wireholder, at unbalanced condition.
RH4862-6 - AUXILIARY CROSSARMS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Item Quant. Description
Reference
kg lb
Ø 64 mm x 1.78 m Crossarm pole

01 01 FLV21310-1 5.10 11.24
insulating length
RH4862-6 Ø 64 mm x 1.35 m Mast pole

02 01 FLV17928-1 2.82 6.22
insulating length
03 01 FLV05613-1 Auxiliary arm “T” 1.30 2.87
04 04 RM4805-16 C-type wireholder without insulator 1.08 2.38
FLV05613-1 RH4862-8 - AUXILIARY CROSSARMS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
kg lb
Ø 64 mm x 2.39 m Crossarm pole

01 01 FLV21310-2 5.10 11.24
insulating length
Ø 64 mm x 1.35 m Mast pole

02 01 FLV17928-1 2.82 6.22
insulating length
04 04 RM4805-16 C-type wireholder without insulator 1.08 2.38

RM4805-16
RH4862-51 - MAST & BRACES

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
kg lb
Ø 64 mm x 2.83 m Mast pole

01 01 FLV17928-2 2.82 6.22
insulating length
Ø 38 mm x 2.03 m Support insulating

02 02 FLV03457-13 6.86 15.12
length
03 02 RM4741-3 Ø 64 mm Collar 1.00 2.20
04 01 RM1728-5 Ø 64 mm for Brace Strap 1.50 3.31

RH4862-51

ACESSORY
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Roller wireholder for mounting on the auxiliary crossarm

RC400-0268 1.90 4.19
of truck cranes or similar vehicle, 1-3/4” opening
Roller wireholder for installation on auxiliary crossarm with

C
RC400-0269 2.50 5.51 RC400-0268
insulator RM4805-7, 2” opening
EXTENSION ARM
They are designed for voltages up to 15 kV and are typically used for
switching conductors or insulators. However, they can also be used at
voltages up to 34.5 kV provided insulators (RM4805-7) are installed in the
wireholders.
It is a tool attached under the crossarm so that approximately 3/4 of its
length exceeds that crossarm to allow the conductors to be transposed
RC400-0269
into their wireholders.
EXTENSION ARM
Maximum
Approx.
Insulating Number of For Crossarm with Vertical Capacity
Catalog Ø Weight
Length Wireholders per Maximum Dimension per Wireholder
Reference (mm)
(m) Product (mm)
daN lb kg lb
RH4800-60 64 1.43 1 95 x 120 68 150 5.80 12.79
RH4800-72 64 1.74 2 95 x 120 68 150 7.40 16.31
95 x 120 e
RT403-2417 64 1.74 2 68 150 6.30 13.90
152 x 152
95 x 120 e
RC400-1310 76 1.74 2 136 230 10.90 24.00
152 x 152

AUXILIARY CROSSARM SUPPORT FOR
AERIAL DEVICE
It is designed for fast and safe operation, with the aid of an aerial device, to
replace crossarms, insulators or poles in short spans of live overhead
networks up to 34.5kV.
It has collars for fitting and adjusting auxiliary Ø 64mm pipe crossarms. It is
C also adaptable in various square or rectangular sections of aerial device.
Its installation and removal is simple and the tool can be easily stored and
transported as it is a compact and lightweight solution for the type of
operation it is intended for.
AUXILIARY CROSSARM SUPPORT FOR AERIAL DEVICE

Approx.
Rated load Man basket Max. perimeter Weight
Catalog
capacity minimum of man basket
Reference
(kgf/lbf)* section (mm) section (mm)
kg lb
128 width
FLV30045-1 280 / 617 910 8.70 19.20
183 height
* Attention should be paid to air basket capacity and restricted to it if it is lower.

TEMPORARY CONDUCTOR SUPPORT
- RC400-0517
The conductor support can be attached to crossarms, with sizes

82 x 102 mm to 152 x 152 mm. The C-shaped clamp as well as the
wireholder is made of heat-treated aluminum alloy and fixed to the
RITZGLAS® tube. It can be installed with the hot stick, and its rated
working capacity is 68 daN (150 lb). C
RC400-0517
- FLV30058-1
The conductor support pole (used for lifting conductor cables through its
upper head by its lifting wireholder) is adaptable to metal post straps
through support with a lower blade.
- RC400-1509 / RH4809-W
They are used to support energized distribution conductors during pole
replacement, repair, or pin or top insulators replacement.
They are equipped with a pole chain stretcher, over Ø 356 mm, and lifting
wireholders for conductors up to Ø 25.4 mm (for RC400-1509 with two
units and RH4809-W with one unit).
When using temporary support with voltages greater than 15 kV or when FLV30058-1
supporting energized conductors in the rain (or chance to rain), mounting
insulators (RM4805-7) is recommended as additional protection.
Rated working capacity on each wireholder: 68 daN (150 lb).
- RT400-1939 / RT400-1940
These two temporary support models have the same functions as RC400-
1509 and RH4809-W. The difference is the pole mounting system, which
in this case coma nylon tie tensioner. (RT400-2007)
RC400-1509
The same recommendations for using the insulator (RM4805-7) and the
rated workload also prevail for these two models.
- RT400-2272
The insulator change support is designed for special applications for
distribution insulator change, whose conductors are angled.
RH4809-W
Used in combination with a nylon strap hoist, it sustains the conductor
under mechanical stress during the insulator change and assists the
conductor back to its original location.
With this tool there is no need to use round covers or blankets on the pole
to insulate the hoist.
RT400-1940
To insulate the hoist with a nylon tie, two insulating rods (RC400-1175 or
RC400-2399 or RC400-2400) are used, connecting their hooks to the
wire grips and their eyes to the hooks of the hoist.
RT400-2272

This equipment was made with Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube, insulating
length 0.15 m and working length 0.40 m. It is coupled to the pole using
the nylon tie tensioner (RT400-2007).
Its rated working capacity is 907 daN.
RT400-2007 TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

Fig. 1 - In this arrangement, the insulator change bracket is installed on the
opposite side of the conductor and is used when a short distance
C Insulator
Change Insulating Pole from the conductor in relation to the post is required.
Support with Hoist
Fig. 2 - In this other arrangement, the insulator change bracket is installed

on the conductor side in order to obtain a greater distance from it.
Nylon
Strap
Hoist TEMPORARY SUPPORT
Fig. 1
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Insulating
Nylon
Pole with Hoist
Strap
Conductor bracket, with crossarm mounting and
Hoist
RC400-0517 2.20 4.85
Ø 32 mm x 200 mm insulating length
Insulator Conductor support pole, adaptable to the post through

Change Support
FLV30058-1 the support with a blade and Ø 38 mm x 250 mm 1.96 4.32
insulating length
Fig. 2
Conductor's bracket, with pole mounting through

chain stretcher, mounted to Ø 64 mm x 1.11 m insulating
RC400-1509 7.70 16.98
length RITZGLAS® tube,
with wireholders
Conductor's bracket, with pole mounting through

chain stretcher mounted on Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube,
RH4809-W 6.30 13.89
with 1 wireholder. Spacing between clamp and pole
mounting: 0.76 m
Pole-mounted conductor's support via nylon tie-pole,

RT400-1939 mounted on Ø 64 mm x 1.11 m insulating length 8.10 17.85
RITZGLAS® tube, with 2 wireholders
Conductor bracket, with pole mounting using a nylon tie

tensioner, mounted on a Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube, with
RT400-1940 6.40 14.00
1 wireholder. Spacing between clamp and pole mounting:
0.76 m
Support for insulator change, with pole mounting system

through a nylon tie tensioner.
RT400-2272 5.90 13.00
Insulating length: 0.15 m
Work length: 0.40 m
1.20 m nylon tensioner for replacement of insulator

RT400-2007 1.40 3.00
change support RT400-2272

STRAIN LINK STICK
It is used in angle anchor structures as insulation between blocks and wire
grips. Large-span conductor loads and “H” structures sometimes exceed
the safe capacities for the wire tong. To supplement the wire tong, attach
the strain link stick to the conductor. This stick is also used to support the
center conductor in “H” type structures when changing insulators or
crossarms.
Constructed with RITZGLAS® insulating tube and aluminum alloy fittings, C
for better mechanical strength and lightness ratio, the swivel eye has
bearings for smooth and perfect rotation. The jaw edges of this tool are
rounded to prevent damage to conductors.
To meet a higher demand for tasks that require loads or varieties of wire
size, this tool is built in four head sizes and variations in pipe lengths.
Insulating Length
STRAIN LINK STICK
Jaw Opening Rated Work Approx.

Dimensions
(mm) Capacity Weight
Catalog
Reference
Ø Insulating
Minimum Maximum daN lb kg lb
(mm) Length (m)
RC400-0814 32 1.70 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 2.30 5.07
RC400-0815 32 2.30 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 2.60 5.73
RC400-0816 32 2.90 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 2.90 6.39
RC400-0817 32 3.60 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 3.20 7.05
RC400-0818 32 4.20 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 3.60 7.94
RH4715-1 32 0.50 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 1.70 3.75
RH4715-2 32 1.10 5.60 19.00 1588 3500 2.00 4.41
Continues on next page 4

Insulating Length
STRAIN LINK STICK
C Dimensions
Jaw Opening
(mm)
Rated Work
Capacity
Approx.
Weight
Catalog
Reference
Ø Insulating
Minimum Maximum daN lb kg lb
(mm) Length (m)
RH4716-1 38 0.45 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 2.90 6.39
RH4716-2 38 1.05 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 3.30 7.28
RH4716-3 38 1.65 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 3.70 8.16
RH4716-4 38 2.25 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 4.15 9.15
RH4716-5 38 2.85 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 4.60 10.14
RH4716-6 38 3.55 11.20 27.00 2948 6500 5.00 11.02
RH4717 38 1.05 18.30 38.00 2948 6500 3.40 7.50
RH4717-1 38 1.65 18.30 38.00 2948 6500 3.80 8.38
RH4718 38 1.05 25.40 63.50 2948 6500 4.30 9.48
RH4718-1 38 1.65 25.40 63.50 2948 6500 4.70 10.36
RH4718-2 38 2.25 25.40 63.50 2948 6500 5.10 11.24
RH4718-3 38 2.85 25.40 63.50 2948 6500 5.60 12.35
RH4718-4 38 3.55 25.40 63.50 2948 6500 6.00 13.23

SPIRAL LINK STICK
It is used in situations where the work areas in the structure have reduced
spaces for the electrician to install the strain link stick safely. An eye near
the spiral hook allows the electrician to install the spiral link pole into the
conductor with the aid of a hot stick.
It is made with a RITZGLAS® tube, a special, hot-dip galvanized, sturdy,
spiral-shaped steel hook suitable for the workloads required for conductors
with sizes up to 1510.5 kcmil ACSR (approx. Ø 38 mm) and aluminum C
alloy heads.
The swivel eye also has bearing for smooth rotation.
SPIRAL LINK STICK
Rated Work Approx.

Dimensions
Capacity Weight
Catalog
Reference
Ø Insulating
daN lb kg lb
(mm) Length (m)
RC400-0812 0.96 2.30 5.07
RH4722 32 0.29 1588 3500 1.00 2.20
RC400-0813 1.57 2.60 5.70
Insulating Length

ROLLER LINK STICK
It is used to move and keep the energized conductor in the middle of the
span in order to obtain more work space when changing the pole.
When placed on the conductor, it is supported by the pole roller for easy
movement along the line with the aid of a rope or block attached to the
eye, pulled by the electrician from the ground.
The roller head of this tool allows a maximum conductor size of up to
C 605 kcmil ACSR (Ø 24 mm approx.).
Constructed with RITZGLAS® tube, its bronze alloy hook and roller is
installed on a threaded pin, responsible for its rotation for closing and
opening the jaw, where the conductor is secured. It has a heat-treated
aluminum alloy heads and a forged steel swivel ring with rolling for smooth
rotation.
ROLLER STICK LINK
Rated Work Approx.

Dimensions
Capacity Weight
Catalog
Reference
Ø Insulating
daN lb kg lb
(mm) Length (m)
RH4714-4 1.13 2.48 5.47

32 454 1000
RH4714-6 1.74 2.80 6.17
Insulating Length

ADJUSTABLE STRAIN POLES
It is made with Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tube and has 6 stainless steel
cross-pins (5 working and 1 locking), at 152 mm intervals to support the
adjustable sleeve or gripper on the live end.
The 5-pin arrangement allows yoke displacement to a maximum length of
608 mm.
The hot-end yokes for suspension or anchor insulator strings are coupled
to the Strain Poles through their adjustable sleeves. The sleeves can be
C
adjusted manually or with a Hot Stick. The adjustable gripper can be used
directly on the Strain Pole to lift the conductor, where yoke use is not
required.
On the de-energized side, a special 305 mm long steel bolt allows a
uniform straining of the assembly through ratchet wrenches and trunnions.
It also has strain jacks of different lengths and the adjustable sleeve or
gripper can be purchased separately or as spare parts.305 mmTrunnions
and ratchet wrench can also be purchased separately.
RE401-1998
305 mm
This tool is essential in a wide variety of tasks when servicing high voltage
(AT) and extra high voltage (EAT) transmission lines. Adjustable Strain
Poles can be used with adjustable sleeve (RE401-0138) or adjustable
gripper (RM4724-1).
COMPOSITION OF THE SET RE401-1510

Adjustable Sleeve Strain Poles (RC401-2144 to RC401-2149 series) are
supplied with the following components:
- 01 Ø 51 mm Strain Pole with clevis head;
- 01 Adjustable Sleeve RE401-0138; Garfo
- 01 Strain Jack RE401-1998 (305 mm length);
- 01 Strain Jack Locking Pin RE401-1510;
- 01 Cotter Pin FLV11384-1;
Rated Work Capacity: 3402 daN (7500 lb).
Insulating Length
Total Length

Insulating Length
Insulating Length Total Length
C ADJUSTABLE STRAIN POLES

Approx.
Insulating
Catalog Maximum Use Total Length Weight
Length
Reference Voltage (kV) (m)
(m)
kg lb
RC401-2144 72.5 2.29 0.91 8.50 18.74
RC401-2145 169 2.60 1.22 8.90 19.62
RC401-2146 242 2.98 1.60 9.30 20.50
RC401-2147 302 3.51 2.13 10.00 22.05
RC401-2215 362 3.98 2.60 11.30 24.91
RC401-2148 552 4.81 3.43 11.50 25.35
RC401-2149 765 5.95 4.57 13.00 28.66
ACCESSORIES
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RE401-0138 Adjustable pole sleeve Ø 51 mm 0.70 1.54 0.70 1.54
RE401-1998 Strain Jack 305 mm long 1.30 2.87
RV401-0157 Strain Jack 610 mm long 1.80 3.97
RV401-0158 Strain Jack 915 mm long 2.30 5.07
RE401-1510 Steel Pin to lock clevis bolt 0.30 0.66

TWO-POLE STRAIN CARRIER
Strain Jack
305 mm
152 mm
Ø 51 mm
C
660 mm
Yoke (cold end) Yoke (hot end)
Simple Trunnion Steel pin

Minimum working length
Maximum working length
The Two-pole Strain Carrier (RC401-2174 to RC401-2179 series) relieves

the mechanical strain of the insulator string so it can be removed from the
energized line for to be changed, either in single or multi-insulator string
according to the string arrangement hardware.
Strain Poles are used with adjustable sleeves and yokes, with trunnions
and strain jacks.
Through the adjustable sleeve the energized side suspension or anchor
yokes are coupled to the Strain Poles. The sleeves can be adjusted
manually or with a Hot Stick.
The energized side yoke includes a steel hook.
The yokes are constructed of rolled aluminum sheets and include a hook
string for anchoring to the structure.
The rated working capacity is: 6804 daN (15000 lb).
TWO-POLE STRAIN CARRIER

Approx.
Working Length (m)
Catalog Weight
Strain Pole
Reference
RC401-2174 RC401-2144 1.09 1.88 33.70 74.30
RC401-2175 RC401-2145 1.40 2.19 34.00 74.96
RC401-2176 RC401-2146 1.78 2.57 34.50 76.06
RC401-2177 RC401-2147 2.32 3.10 35.20 77.60
RC401-2216 RC401-2215 2.78 3.57 36.20 79.81
RC401-2178 RC401-2148 3.61 4.40 36.70 80.91
RC401-2179 RC401-2149 4.75 5.54 38.20 84.22

Strain Jacks, adjustable gloves, trunnions or yokes can be purchased
separately as replacement parts.
COMPOSITION OF THE ASSEMBLY
The above mentioned Double Strain Carriers are supplied with the
following components:
RC401-1721
- 02 Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® Strain Poles, with clevis heads and pins and
cotter pins;
C - 01 Yoke RC401-1721 for anchoring to the structure (including its
respective string Rm1942);
RM1942
- 01 Yoke RC401-1720 for hot-end mounting;
- 02 strain jacks RE401-1998 (305 mm);
- 02 Adjustable Sleeve RE401-0138;
- 02 Simple Trunnions RE401-2068;
- 01 Socket for Yoke RC401-1720
RC401-1720
DISTRIBUTION STRAIN CARRIER

305 mm
Strain Jack
152 mm
Ø 32 mm
553 mm
Yoke (cold end) Yoke (hot end)
Simple Trunnion Steel pin

Insulating Length
Minimum working length
Maximum working length
The RC401-0411 and RC401-0410 Distribution Double Strain Carriers

relieves the tension of the anchor insulator string to allow it to be removed
from the energized line. It has a yoke on the hot-end equipped with jaws
that are mounted to the conductor by compression, tightening each time
the strain load increases.
These jaws are designed to be mounted to conductors with Ø 7.40 to
20.50 mm (2 to 397.5 ACSR). The other end of the assembly is equipped
with yoke and hook string for anchoring to the structure. Special 305 mm
long steel bolts with single trunnion allow for even strain of the assembly.
Rated working capacity is 2948 daN/6500 lb for distribution strings
between 69 and 145 kV.

DISTRIBUTION STRAIN CARRIER
Working Length Approx.
Catalog (m) Weight
Strain Pole
Reference
RC401-0411 FLV12240-2 1.10 1.70 26.70 58.86
RC401-0410 FLV12240-1 1.70 2.32 27.30 60.19

C
STRAIN POLE
Approx. Weight
Catalog Insulating Length Overall Length
Reference (m) (m)
kg lb
FLV12240-2 0.97 1.83 6.20 13.67
FLV12240-1 1.59 2.44 5.40 11.90
COMPOSITION OF THE SET

Distribution Double Strain Carriers are supplied with the following
components:
- 02 Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® Poles, for adjustments to the yoke through
the 05 steel pins in each pole and adjusting every 152 mm;
- 01 Yoke FLV12192-1 for hot-end mounting;
FLV12192-1
- 01 Yoke FLV12239-1 for anchoring the assembly to the structure
through the chain (RM1942) accompanying the assembly;
- 02 Strain Jacks RE401-1998 (305 mm);
- 02 Simple Trunnions RE401-2068.
Strain Jacks, trunnions, and yokes can be purchased separately as spare
parts.
FLV12239-1
RM1942

LIGHT-WEIGHT STRAIN CARRIER
It is designed for Grosbeak conductors, up to 636 MCM (Ø 25.15 mm),
for changes of single strings of 69 to 145 kV anchorage and 110 to 145
kV suspension on live lines.
The excellent mechanical characteristics of the RITZGLAS® tube allow the
strain pole diameter to be reduced to just 32 mm (1-1/4”), with consequent
proportional reduction of metal parts, making it a light and practical set for
C easy handling and transport.
Metal tools that work on the de-energized side are used for both anchoring
and suspension, providing versatility to the assembly and making it more
economical and attractive in terms of cost effectiveness.
LIGHT-WEIGHT STRAIN CARRIER
Rated Work
Catalog Capacity
Description
Reference
daN lb
Light-Weight Strain Carrier for

FLV17450-1 69 to 145 kV anchoring and 110 to 145 kV suspension 2948 6500
on energized lines

APPLICATION OF EACH TOOL
1. FLV13352-1 (Cold-end yoke)
It is applied to anchor and suspension strings.
In anchor strings, it is coupled to the tower crossarm, with the help of the
clevis pin and the string, fitted directly into the ball clevis extension, up to
22 mm, and shoulder, up to 38 mm.
FLV13352-1
In the suspension string it is coupled to the tower crossarm with the aid of
the support (FLV13356-1. C
2. FLV13356-1 (support)
It is supported and mounted to the end of the tower crossarm to support
and couple the cold-end yoke (FLV13352-1) in suspension string changes.
3. FLV12192-1 (jugo lado vivo)

It couples directly to the cable, eliminating the use of tensioner when
changing the anchor string.
4. FLV13780-1 (insulating strain pole)

FLV13356-1
The cold-end yoke is attached to the strain jack. The 10 pairs of hot-end
pins support and couple the yoke without requiring an adjustment sleeve
when changing the insulator string in the anchor structure.
5. FLV13130-1 (insulating strain pole)

With the Strain Jack (RE401-1998) coupling at one end and the Spiral Hook
(FLV13006-1, FLV13006-2, FLV13006-3) at the other end, this tool is used
to support the cable in suspension string exchange.
FLV12192-1
STRAIN POLE
Working Length (m)
Catalog Insulating Length
Reference (m)
Minimum Maximum
FLV13780-1 1.09 1.16 2.53
FLV13130-1 1.22 1.45 1.45 FLV13780-1
NOTE
Poles in other lengths can be purchased on request
FLV13130-1

6. RE401-1998 (strain jack)
Attachable to the strain pole (FLV13780-1) by the eye yoke system and to
the dead yoke (FLV13352-1) through the single trunnions (RE401-2068).
RE401-1998
NOTE
Bolts in other lengths can be purchased on request.
7. RE401-2068 (single trunnions)

C Threaded into the strain jack (RE401-1998) with the aid of the ratchet
wrench (RM1948-3) to tension the conductor, transferring the string load
RE401-2068 to the strain set.
8. FLV13006-1 / FLV13006-2 / FLV13006-3 (spiral hook)

Coupled to the Strain Pole (FLV13130-1), the spiral hook secures the
conductor to support it in the suspension string change. Each of the 3
FLV13006-1 hook sizes is used according to the length of the hot-end hardware of the
insulator string.
9. RM1948-3 (ratchet wrench)

FLV13006-2
Although this tool is not included in the strain set, we recommend
purchasing it for single trunnion application (RE401-2068).
10. FLV19286-1 (bag)

FLV13006-3
Used for storage and transporting of strain pole FLV13780-1.
11. FLV19286-2 (bag)

Used for storage and transporting of strain pole FLV13130-1.
12. ATR09962-1 (multi-purpose handbag)

Used for storage and transport of the other components of the set.
RM1948-3

COMPOSITION OF THE ANCHOR SET
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description Quantity
Reference
kg lb
FLV13352-1 Cold-end yoke with clevis bolt and string 01 8.10 17.86
RE401-1998 305 mm long strain jacks with 02 1.30 2.87

C
RE401-2068 Simple trunnions 02 0.83 1.83
Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® Insulating Strain Poles, 2.70 m total length, with cast aluminum
FLV13780-1 02 4.10 9.04
clevis for strain jack coupling and 10 pins, 152 mm spacing for hot-end yoke coupling
Cast aluminum alloy hot-end yoke with 2 pairs of ACSR cable clamps, minimum 2 AWG
FLV12192-1 01 6.10 13.45
(Ø 6.6 mm) to maximum 636 MCM (Ø 25 mm)
Total 20.43 45.04
COMPOSITION OF THE SUSPENSION SET

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description Quantity
Reference
kg lb
FLV13352-1 Cold-end yoke with clevis bolt and string 01 8.10 17.86
RE401-1998 305 mm long strain jacks with 02 1.30 2.87
RE401-2068 Simple trunnions 02 0.83 1.83
Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® Insulating Strain Poles, total length 1.46 m,

FLV13130-1 02 2.60 5.73
with die-cast aluminum clevis at both ends
Cast aluminum alloy support for coupling to the tower crossarm,

FLV13356-1 01 3.40 7.50
hook string, and safety lock
Spiral Hook Parts of special heat treated steel, 695 mm length with eye for coupling to
FLV13006-1 02 2.30 5.07
the clevis-clevis strain pole
FLV13006-2 02 2.00 4.41
FLV13006-3 02 1.80 3.97
Total 22.30 49.16

SECTIONAL STRAIN POLE (WITH SPLICE)
Designed to withstand the mechanical strain of conductor cables while
maintaining suspension or anchor insulator strings where their lengths
differ from conventional standards.
This pole consists of three parts: hot-end pole (energized), cold-end pole
(de-energized), and the fiberglass splicing sleeve, which is the central tube
responsible for joining the live and cold end poles.
C Constructed with Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tube, each has a clevis-type
bronze alloy head for connection to the yokes. The splicing sleeve is
manufactured by a special process, with Ø 76 mm exterior reinforced
fiberglass, and has equidistant holes every 100 mm, making it possible to
assemble the hot-end and cold-end poles, within pre-established lengths.
The poles also allow combinations with strain jacks in lengths 305, 610
and 915 mm for additional gain in overall assembly length.
Hot or cold-end poles, splice sleeve, strain jack, or cotter pins can be
purchased separately as spare parts.
NOTE
Although the splicing sleeve is manufactured to a standard length of 1.12
m, dead and hot-end poles can be purchased with special lengths to suit
the types and strains of each company's networks. For such supplies,
which will depend on the arrangements of the strings, their design must be
sent to our engineering department for technical feasibility analysis.
COMPOSITION OF THE SET

- 01 RITZGLAS® hot-end pole, with clevis-type bronze alloy head and
steel pin and cotter pin.
- 01 RITZGLAS® cold-end pole, with clevis-type bronze alloy head and
steel pin and cotter pin.
- 01 fiberglass splicing sleeve, 1.12 m long, and two sets of steel pins
and cotter pins.
SECTIONAL STRAIN POLE WITH FIBERGLASS SPLICE

Rated Work Approx.
Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Sectional Strain Pole with splicing sleeve, with 8 adjustment holes, minimum
RC401-0758 4536 10000 13.90 30.64
length 3.15 m and maximum length 3.75 m
100 mm
Ø 51 mm Ø 75 mm
1,44 m 0,27 m 1,44 m

ACCESSORIES FOR STRAIN CARRIERS
- FLV10460-1
The installation of the locknut is recommended for shortly after placing the
trunnions on the strain jacks as additional safety during the strain
operation, and acts as a support in the trunnions. FLV10460-1
- RE401-2066 / RE401-2068
The trunnions (shielded and single) are specially designed for coupling the C
yokes on the strain poles. They are made of bronze alloy and have
bearings to make them light during their rotation on the strain jacks, which
is done through the ratchet wrench (RM1948-3)..
- RE401-0138
RE401-2068 / RE401-2066
The adjustable sleeve is constructed of heat treated aluminum alloy and
designed for coupling the yokes to the strain poles on the hot-end. A
mobile device in this tool allows (manually or via stick) adjustment and
displacement of the sleeve for better positioning on the Strain Pole's steel
pins.
- RE401-1998 / RV401-0157 / RV401-0158

The Tongue type Strain Jacks are used in coupling to the strain poles as an RE401-0138
adjustment tool in insulator string straining.
They are coupled through the eye of the strain pole through the head in
one of its ends.
- FLV17755-1 RE401-1998
Trunnion Gauge. Made of steel, this gauge (also known as “Go/No-Go”) is

an essential tool for periodically checking the trunnion threads to check for
wear on the trunnion threads.
This gauge is threaded, with increased thickness by 0.5 mm. When
testing, if the trunnion allows its insertion, even partially, a thread wear of
more than 0.5 mm will be identified, thus ensuring that it is unfit for use.
FLV17755-1
- RH4785-1 / RH4785-2 / RH4785-3 / RT400-0025
Clevis type strain jacks are used in connection with the clevis-eye strain
poles (RH1949-113 / RC400-0612 and RC400-0613) as an adjustment
tool for straining insulator strings. RH4785-1
They are coupled through the eye of the strain pole through the head in one
of its ends.
- RM1948-3
The reversible ratchet wrench is specially developed for hex nuts and
trunnions that make up the single or double strain carrier assembly.
RM1948-3
- FLV16054-1
Reversible ratchet wrench for hex nuts and trunnions where more effort is
required.
FLV16054-1

ACCESSORIES FOR STRAIN CARRIERS
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
RE401-1998 Strain jack with total length 305 mm 4536 10000 1.30 2.87
C
RV401-0157 Strain jack with total length 610 mm 4536 10000 1.80 3.97
RV401-0158 Strain jack with total length 915 mm 4536 10000 2.30 5.07
RH4785-1 Clevis Type Strain Jack Total Length 305 mm 4536 10000 1.40 3.09
RT400-0025 Clevis Type Strain Jack Total Length 915 mm 4536 10000 2.50 5.51
RE401-0138 Strain Pole Sleeve Ø 51 mm in aluminum alloy 3402 7500 0.70 1.54
RE401-1510 Steel pin for strain pole clevis - - 0.30 0.66
R059738 Click safety cotter pin for yoke steel pin locking - - 0.05 0.11
RE401-2066 Shielded Trunnion 4536 10000 1.40 3.09
RE401-2068 Simple Trunnion 4536 10000 0.83 1.83
FLV17755-1 Trunnion gauge and case - - 0.37 0.82
RM1948-3 Ratchet Wrench for hex-nuts and trunnions of the strain carrier - - 1.05 2.32
FLV16054-1 Prolonged Ratchet Wrench for hex-nuts and trunnions of the strain carriers - - 1.20 2.65
FLV10460-1 Safety steel nut for trunnion support - - 0.11 0.24

STRAIN POLE
CLEVIS-EYE / CLEVIS-CLEVIS
They are designed for use in single or multiple suspension or anchor
strings. Also used in V-strings, directly coupled to the yoke plate hole in
order to relieve the load of the two strings simultaneously.
Built with RITZGLAS® tubes, they feature non-swiveling aluminum alloy eye
heads and adapt to a wide range of aluminum sheet yoke shapes through C
the bronze alloy clevis heads.
CLEVIS-EYE STRAIN POLE
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Description Length
Reference (mm)
(m)
daN lb kg lb
With bronze alloy clevis head, 27 mm internal

RC400-0612 2.52 6.10 13.45
opening and locking eye pin
51 2948 6500
RC400-0613 3.05 6.70 14.77
Insulating Length
CLEVIS-CLEVIS STRAIN POLE
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Description Length
Reference (mm)
(m)
daN lb kg lb

FLV29023-1 3.79 9.30 20.5

FLV29023-2 4.09 9.70 21.40

FLV29023-3 51 3.94 5443 12000 9.50 20.90

FLV29023-4 1.84 6.90 15.20

FLV29023-5 4.29 9.90 21.80
opening and locking eye pin.
Insulating Length

HOT STICK TENSION PULLER
It is intended for strain and support of energized conductors. The hot
tension puller stick can also be used during insulator replacement,
conductor splicing work or for a number of works on energized
installations.
Its basic construction (combining Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tube and single
body strain device) makes it a versatile and complete tool.
C It has non-rotating forged steel hooks and safety lock and eyebolts, which
llow the quick and easy installation of the insulated strain jack manually or
by means of an insulating pole.
The safety locks turn 135° to the right and left from the closed position.
The drive lever has an eye for insertion of the stick and allows operation
from distance.
HOT TENSION PULLER STICK
Max Load Approx.

Work Length Maximum Tool Insulating
Catalog Voltage Capacity Weight
Between Hooks Displacement Length
Reference (kV)
(m) (m) (m)
daN lb kg lb
Minimum: 1.64
RC400-0574 34.5 0.79 6.40 14.11
Maximum: 1.94
1814 4000 0.30
Minimum: 1.84
RC400-0575 69.0 0.99 6.50 14.33
Maximum: 2.14
Insulating Length
Work Length

AUXILIARY STRAIN CARRIER
The Auxiliary Strain Pole is a lightweight, portable tool designed for quick
replacement of damaged insulators in de-energized suspension strings,
especially when the number of damaged insulators does not justify the
removal and lowering of the entire string for ground replacement.
However, the handling of the auxiliary strain pole requires special attention
regarding its installation in the network in order to avoid accidents.
C
SAFETY PROCEDURE
1. This tool is only used in de-energized networks.
2. Prior to the installation of the auxiliary strain pole, the electrician will first
need to install the complete strain set (described in the previous pages)
and suitable for the insulator string in order to relieve the mechanical
strain of the string and allow insulator decoupling.
3. After that, the auxiliary strain pole will be mounted on the insulator
directly above the one to be replaced (changing one insulator at a time).
WARNING
When coupling, make sure that the insulator cap is resting only on the
upper base of the yoke.
AUXILIARY STRAIN POLE

Approx.
Max Load.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Auxiliary strain pole for insulator change

FLV11537-1 600 1322 8.15 17.95
in suspension strings

HEAVY-DUTY SUSPENSION LINK STICK
It is designed for suspension of Ø 25 to 64 mm conductors and can be
used with a number of lifting devices at the structure end.
Constructed with a Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tube, one end is fitted with a
cast aluminum alloy main head with rubber coating to prevent damage to
the conductor.
At the other end it is fitted with an aluminum alloy head and non-swivel eye.
C
SUSPENSION LINK STICK

Dimensions
Rated Work Approx.
Catalog Conductor Heads Capacity Weight
Reference (Ø) Ø Insulating
(mm) Length (m)
daN lb kg lb
RH4719-84 2.00 5.00 11.02
RH4719-96 3/4” to 1-3/4” 38 2.31 2948 6500 5.30 11.68
RH4719-114 2.61 5.70 12.55
RH4720-84 2.00 5.20 11.45
RH4720-96 1” to 2-1/2” 38 2.31 2948 6500 5.50 12.10
RH4720-114 2.61 5.90 13.00
Insulating Length

ADJUSTABLE HOOK ASSEMBLY
This tool can be used with strain poles RC401-2144 to RC401-2149 and
is a simple and fast method of lightening the mechanical load on a
suspension string.
It has a circular shape with a movable jaw that is adjusted to the conductor
through the eye bolt, which allows a Ø 28 to 64 mm (RM4724-1) and Ø 14
to 36 mm (FLV16193-1) coupling approximately.
This movable jaw is self-aligning with the conductor as it has a 45° left or
C
right vertical variation.
The gripper is adjusted to the steel pole pins every 152 mm.
ADJUSTABLE HOOK ASSEMBLY
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Adjustable Hook Assembly

RM4724-1 2.60 5.73
(Ø 28 to 64 mm)
1688 3720
Suspension Adjustable Hook Assembly RM4724-1
FLV16193-1 2.55 5.62
(Ø 14 to 36 mm)

SUSPENSION POLE WITH ADJUSTABLE HOOK
Made with Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube and designed for lines with
suspension loads not exceeding 1134 daN/2500 lb.
The position of the conductor hook can be adjusted along the pole
according to the length of the insulator string. Tightening the nuts on each
side of the adjustable hook clamp ensures their secure connection to the
pole.
C The hook has wide jaws with rounded corners to prevent crushing or cuts
in the conductor.
The swivel eye rotates freely and enables the use of hoists, ropes, or
screws. The strain hook and base terminal are made of sturdy, heat-treated
aluminum alloy.
SUSPENSION POLE WITH ADJUSTABLE HOOK
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Catalog Total Length Capacity Weight
Length
Reference (m)
(m)
daN lb kg lb
RH4710-4 2.00 1.55 1134 2500 6.50 14.33
Insulating Length
YOKE
They are tools for coupling strain poles to yoke plates, extensors or other
support in structures to relieve the mechanical stress of a single or multiple
insulator string at anchor or suspension in order to replace damaged
insulators.
Yokes and their components are designed to fit various structure
configurations. Where models available in this catalog do not meet a
specific structure type, tower arm or support bracket and string
arrangement drawings must be submitted for evaluation by our engineering
department to design the correct yoke and its components.
The yokes are made of heat treated cast aluminum alloy or rolled aluminum
plate.
OBSERVATION
Safety click cotter pin (R059738) can be purchased separately as a spare
part.

Two-pole strain carrier Yokes
mm
660
For better user information, in some applications, there are matches
between the two versions of cast aluminum and rolled aluminum yokes as
follows:
- RC401-1720 (rolled) is equivalent to RM2946-1 (cast)
RC401-1720 includes steel hook and socket for 7/8” x 1-1/2” extension RC401-1720
(RC401-1894).
RM2946-1 includes extension sockets (RM2945-1, RM2945-3, and 53
5m
C
RM2945-9). m
- RC401-1721 (rolled) is equivalent to RM2946-12 (cast) Both yokes

include the RM1942 chain.
- RC401-0095
It is used with double strain poles and does not require the use of strain
jacks as it is attached directly to the strain clamp of the anchor string. This
jaw has a mobile device for the insertion and locking of the clamp before
the strain. RM2946-1
660
Before installation, the clamp corresponding to the conductor size to be mm
pulled must be set.
NOTE
The jaw must be coupled over the compression clamp sleeve.
This yoke comes with 04 interchangeable jaws:
- 24 AH for conductors 477 to 556.5 kcmil ACSR Ø 21.7 to 23.4 mm
RC401-1721
- 30 AH for conductors 715 to 954 kcmil ACSR Ø 27.4 to 29.6 mm
535 mm
- 36 AH for conductors 1192.5 to 1351.5 kcmil ACSR Ø 34 to 36.2 mm
- Ø 19.0 to 25.4 mm (3/4” to 1”).
- RT401-0935
Designed for hot-end suspension string for triple or quadruple yoke plate
coupling, used in conjunction with clevis-clevis tensioner rods.
Constructed with extra strong rolled aluminum sheets.
RM2946-12
TWO-POLE STRAIN CARRIERS
Rated Work Approx.
Catalog Cap. Weight m
Description 0m
Reference 63
daN lb kg lb
RC401-1720 Hot-side double yoke 6804 15000 12.00 26.45
(socket) 6804 15000

Hot-side double yoke or
RM2946-1 9.00 19.85 RC401-0095
Cold-end
(hook) 4000 8818
RC401-1721 Double yoke with string, cold-end 6804 15000 7.50 16.53
RM2946-12 Double yoke with string, cold-end 6804 15000 9.70 21.38 mm
230
Compression end yoke for double

RC401-0095 strain carrier, made with rolled 4990 11000 21.85 48.17
aluminum sheets
mm
660
Double yoke, hot end for 6804 string
RT401-0935 6804 15000 7.30 16.10
“I” suspension (Crate Type) RT401-0935

Single Pole Strain Carrier Yokes
They are used with the adjustable strain pole (series RC401-2144 through
RC401-2149) to release the mechanical strain of double and multiple
insulator strings, either in suspension or anchor strings during insulator
replacement work.
They are designed to adapt to a number of yoke plates and must be
RC401-0003
purchased in pairs according to the structure design. In some cases it can
be used on either the energized or de-energized side of the insulator string.
C
For certain applications, some yokes may alternatively be used (see table
containing rated working capacity):
- RC401-1717 can replace RM1947-1
- RC401-1718 can replace RC401-0003
RC401-0155
- RC401-1719 can replace RC401-0155
SINGLE POLE STRAIN CARRIER YOKES
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
RM1947-1
RC401-0003 Balancim triangular 3402 7500 5.20 11.46
RC401-0155 Balancim triangular 2268 5000 3.80 8.38
RM1947-1 Balancim retangular 5443 12000 14.00 30.86
RC401-1719 Balancim triangular

RC401-1719 6804 15000 9.40 20.72
espessura máxima 3/4”
Balancim triangular
RC401-1718 6804 15000 8.90 19.62
espessura máxima 1”
Balancim retangular
RC401-1717 6804 15000 13.30 29.32
espessura máxima 3/4”
RC401-1718
Balancim triangular de
RT401-0573 4990 11000 4.80 10.58
chapa dupla (padrão SADE)
RC401-1717
RT401-0573

Structure Yokes
- RH4783-22
It is a practical and extremely versatile tool for the replacement of insulator
strings. It simply and quickly fits onto the structure and supports strain
poles in order to relieve the mechanical stress of a suspended insulator
string in conjunction with hot-end strain poles and yokes.
Yoke supports are designed to fit a number structure configurations.
However, we recommend that you submit the structure drawings upon C
consultation for evaluation by our engineering department.
Block-built with aluminum alloy moving parts.
It allows a 74 to 181 mm adjustment between the support brackets and
measures 554 mm from center to center of the swivel brackets for the
strain poles. RH4783-22
- RC400-0219
It is generally used in “H” crossarms, with similar design and applications to
the steel structure yoke (RH4783-22). To adapt to the various crossarm sizes,
the fixing screws can be adjusted in three positions from center to center
(230, 280, and 330 mm) and 230 to 305 mm from the vertical.
- RC400-0445
It is designed for use at the end of the crossarm, coupled through the
RC400-0219
RT400-0838 support when necessary. It has its rotary couplings and
allows the correct alignment of the strain poles in relation to the yoke on
the energized side.
Its rated working capacity is 6804 daN/15000 lb when limited to a 45°
angle: 4082 daN/9000 lb.
- RT400-0838 RC400-0445
It is used in conjunction with the metal crossarm yoke (RC400-0445) when
the metal crossarm does not originally have the yoke attachment bracket.
Built in aluminum alloy, it is fixed to the metal crossarm through the chain
stretcher.
- RC401-1722
Constructed of rolled aluminum plate and used in conjunction with strain
poles (RC401-2144 to RC401-2149 series), it is normally attached to the
hot-end yoke plate of the “V” suspension string. For certain applications,
this yoke can be replaced by model RH4794, made of cast aluminum. RT400-0838
660 mm
RC401-1722

- RC401-0168
660 mm It is used as a single “V” suspension string that can be attached to the
yoke plate arm with adjustable splicing sleeves or clevis-eye rings. Made of
extra strong rolled aluminum plate.
RC401-0168 - RT401-0689
Similar to RC401-0168, however, without the bronze adapter. Usually used
660 mm on the energized side of double-anchored “V” suspension strings, with
C reduced coupling spaces.
- RH4794
It is typically used on the hot-end of single “I” suspension strings on 220 to
RT401-0689
345 kV twin-cable transmission lines. Constructed of heat-treated cast
aluminum alloy, it has a duplicator saddle (RH4794-1) installed at its base.
NOTE
The RH4794-2 duplicator support saddle model (which is also used in
conjunction with the Jugo RH4794) can be purchased separately when
RH4794 required.
- RH4794-1 / RH4794-2
They are used in conjunction with the RH4794 yoke for coupling to the
insulator string yoke plate with continuous 360° rotation.
They have two sizes (89 and 305 mm) for better fit to the yoke plate and
both sizes are made of aluminum alloy.
RH4794-1
STRUCTURE YOKES
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
RH4794-2 RH4783-22 Steel structure yoke 5443 12000 23.60 52.03
RC400-0219 Tower yoke 5443 12000 17.50 35.58
RC400-0445 Metal crossarm yoke 6804 15000 8.30 18.30
RT400-0838 Metal crossarm adapter support 6804 15000 5,30 11,68
Living double side yoke for single “V”

RC401-1722 6804 15000 10.30 22.71
suspension string
Living double side yoke for single “V”

RC401-0168 6804 15000 6.50 14.33
suspension string
V-side double yoke for “V” suspension

RT401-0689 6804 15000 3.50 7.72
string and double anchor
RH4794 Suspension hot yoke with 3 ½” saddle 6804 15000 7.60 16.76
3 ½” duplicator support saddle

RH4794-1 6804 15000 0.69 1.52
(replacement)
RH4794-2 12” duplicator support saddle - - 1.00 2.20

STATIC GROUND
It is designed to eliminate the nuisance of the electrostatic charge during
coupling and decoupling of insulator strings when working on energized
installations. It also dissipates the static charge through the copper cable
(16 mm² size x 2.0 m long) and clamp for connection to structure hardware
or conductor cables.
To ground the insulator string on the de-energized side, the grounding
clamp must be installed on the structure angle and the pole jaws must be C
installed on the insulator hardware closest to the structure.
For bare-hand work, the clamp should be installed to the energized
hardware and the stick jaws to the second insulator on the energized side.
Constructed with Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® tube and 0.76 m in total length.
Its bronze alloy jaws are designed for Ø 64 to 152 mm insulator hardware.
The clamps for connection to the structure have two installation versions
(with T-handle and eyescrew). Both clamps are constructed of bronze
alloy, with the clamp body being in aluminum alloy.
RC600-0000
STATIC GROUND
Approx.
Insulating
Catalog Weight
Description Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
Static grounding with T-handle

RC600-0000 3.10 6.83
connecting clamp
0.43
Static grounding with
RHG4230-1 3.30 7.27
connecting eyescrew
RHG4230-1

CRADLE
There are three basic cradle solutions to meet a variety of insulator
maintenance and replacement requirements.
All are built with RITZGLAS® tubes for work on 110 to 800 kV anchor or
suspension strings.
- Single Insulator Cradles

C It is generally used in 110 to 230 kV strings, supported by a pair of wire
tongs or strain link stick.
- Cradle with fittings

It is used in 345 to 500 kV strings and in combination with cradle supports
to allow insulators movement.
- Cradle with bracket (side opening) for extra high voltage

It is used in anchor strings up to 800 kV to allow single or multiple string
removal.

Single Insulator Cradles
It is used to change insulators in the string itself or to lower it to the
ground. In anchor strings or angled strings, this cradle is used in
conjunction with support rods. As for “I” suspensions, strain poles are
used.
Constructed with Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tubes, this series of single
cradles has two steel pins at their front, which are used to support the
insulator string with a pair of wire tongs or strain link stick.
C
At the rear of the crib there are large eyes and ropes for coupling to the
structure as an anchor point. In this way, the insulators can be raised or
lowered to a more suitable position for replacement.
When lowering the insulator string is not necessary, the cradles are
mounted to the eyes located on the yokes coupled to the strain poles.
TRANSMISSION INSULATOR CRADDLES

Approx.
Insulating
Catalog Weight
Maximum Capacity Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
RH1840-4 6 insulators up to Ø 254 mm 1.22 5.80 12.79
SPARE PARTS AND COMPONENTS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV19067-1 Cradle center spacer 0.80 1.76
FLV17458-1 Metal spacer with side cradle holders 1.00 2.20
Metal spacer with side eyes and 2.50 m insulating

FLV17445-1 1.60 3.53
rope at its cradle ends
RITZGLAS® tube, Ø 38 mm x 1.22 m,

RH4540 0.90 1.98
with plastic end fitting

RH4540-1 1.30 2.87

RH4540-2 1.70 3.75

RH4540-3 2.10 4.63

RH4540-4 2.50 5.51

Cradle with fittings
It is used to change insulators in strings up to 500 kV. It is also required to
lower “V” or anchor insulator strings and to lift “I” suspension insulators.
The deep design of the cradle is a safe way to prevent accidental fall of the
insulator string. In addition, it is reinforced by the upper insulator retaining
plate, which securely holds it during transport.
The insulator plate has dual use: on one side fits insulators up to Ø 273
C mm; and, on the opposite side, it adapts to insulators up to Ø 286 mm.
The cradle can be easily lowered or lifted for insulator change through the
forged steel swivel eyes at one end and the other with the aid of the steel
handle (R070184) attached to a strain link stick, and it also has an auxiliary
hook (R068922).
The steel strap and hook are supplied with the cradle.
EHV THROUGH DESIGN INSULATOR CRADLES
Insulating Approx.
Catalog Weight
Maximum Capacity Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
RC401-0015 25 insulators up to Ø 286 mm 3.40 16.40 36.16

Approx.
FLV17453-1
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV17453-1 Cradle center metal spacer 1.60 3.53
FLV17446-1 Aluminum cradle plate 2.60 5.73
FLV17446-1 FLV17447-1 Metal spacer with side cradle holders 1.60 3.53
R068922 Plastic coated steel hook 0.55 1.21
R070184 Galvanized steel handle 1.10 2.43
Ø 38mm RITZGLAS® tube for RC401-0015,

FLV18594-4 3.23 7.12
with plastic terminal and metal head
FLV17447-1
Ø 38mm RITZGLAS® tube for RC401-0015,

FLV18593-4 2.60 5.73
with plastic terminals
Ø 38mm RITZGLAS® tube for RH1950-9,

FLV18594-3 2.70 5.95
R068922 with plastic terminal and metal head
Ø 38mm RITZGLAS® tube for RH1950-9,

FLV18593-3 2.07 4.56
with plastic terminals
R070184

C
Cradle Support
It is made with Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube and its main structure has a
heat-treated aluminum head with forged steel swivel eye and three pairs of
hooks, which are coupled to a spiral link pole and act as a support.
CRADLE SUPPORT
Rated Work Approx.

Insulating
Catalog Maximum Capacity Weight
Length
Reference Capacity
(m)
daN lb kg lb
Cradle support with

RH1950-90 2.97 227 500 13.40 29.54
3 pairs of hooks

Support Cradle
It has been developed for the selective removal of a single insulator string,
particularly, in double, triple, or quadruple anchor strings. Using this cradle,
it is not necessary to remove the upper strings to extract the lower strings.
Constructed with Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tube as its main element, it has
three Ø 38 mm pipes.
The tubes has swiveling eyes at its ends.
C 0.38 m hooks are used in mountings with single or double anchor strings,
while with the 0.79 m hook is used to remove quadruple lower anchor
strings.
The insulator plate has dual use: on one side fits insulators up to Ø 279
mm; and, on the opposite side, it adapts to insulators up to Ø 324 mm.
In conjunction with the cradle, tie rods are provided for coupling to the
boom pole, a plate for retaining the upper insulator, hook arrangements,
and metal spacers.
EHV SIDE-OPENING INSULATOR CRADLES
Rated Work Approx.

Description
Reference
daN lb kg lb
Long insulating cradle of 4.83 m , 4

RC401-0354 long support hooks of 0.38 m, 2 66.00 136.69
metal spacers and 1 plate

454 1000



RC401-0358 42.60 93.92
long hooks of 0.38 m and 1 plate
227 500

RC401-0359 44.00 97.00
long hooks of 0.79 m and 1 plate

1
6 9
5
5
5
2
7
3
4
C
8

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Item Description
Reference
kg lb
1 FLV01852-1 Cradle tie rod support 1.15 2.54
Cradle support hook with ® Ø 51 x 390 mm

RC401-0361 4.50 9.92
RITZGLAS®
2
Cradle support hook with ® Ø 51 x 810 mm
RC401-0362 5.70 12.55
RITZGLAS®
3 FLV03460-1 Cradle metal spacer 2.60 5.73
4 RC401-0455 Insulator plate 3.15 6.95
5 RE402-0138 Ø 64 mm clamp for rod 0.80 1.75
Ø 64 X 4830 mm (insulated) RITZGLAS® tube with RC401-0361

FLV18595-1 8.80 19.40
plastic terminal and eye head
Ø 64 X 3890 mm (insulated) RITZGLAS® tube with

6 FLV18595-2 7.45 16.42

FLV18595-3 5.40 11.90

FLV18594-1 4.50 9.92 FLV03460-1

7 FLV18594-2 3.60 7.94

FLV18594-3 2.60 5.75
FLV18593-1 Ø 38 X 4874 mm RITZGLAS® tube with plastic terminal 3.90 8.60
8 FLV18593-2 Ø 38 X 3954 mm RITZGLAS® tube with plastic terminal 2.95 6.50 RC401-0455
FLV18593-3 Ø 38 X 2734 mm RITZGLAS® tube with plastic terminal 2.20 4.85
Ø 38 x 349 mm (insulated length) RITZGLAS® pole

FLV03457-2 2.15 4.74
with tie-down head (clevis type) and eye head

FLV03457-3 2.50 5.52
9
FLV03457-5 2.85 6.28
Ø 38 x 1416 mm (insulated length) RITZGLAS® pole FLV01852-1

FLV03457-6 3.00 6.61

“J” - HOOK ASSEMBLY
It is used as an efficient alternative solution to remove lower insulators in a
triple string.
Constructed with RITZGLAS® tube, one end features a freely rotating
steel hook for quick and easy string adjustment. To ensure the protection
of the insulators, the hook has a plastic coating.
For complete cradle assembly, with the “J” hook assembly, the
C RC401-0354 to RC401-0359 series cradle main support must be
mounted.
“J”- HOOK ASSEMBLY
Rated Work Approx.

Catalog Ø Length Capacity Weight
Reference (mm) (m)
daN lb kg lb
RC402-0790 51 0.91 113 250 4.00 8.81
RC402-0790
Catalog
Description
Reference
FLV03457-2 Small crib tie rod
RC402-0790 “J”- Hook Assembly
FLV18595-1 Ø 64 mm Tube w/ plastic terminal and cradle eye
RE402-0138 Ø 64 mm clamp for rod
FLV03457-6 Cradle tie pole
FLV01852-1 Cradle tie rod support

TROLLEY POLE
It is used to transport the suspension insulator string to the structure.
Constructed with RITZGLAS® tubing and aluminum and steel metal parts,
the trolley pole can be installed horizontally under the tower crossarm
through the metal structure saddle.
The scoop (RH4723-2), with a socket for Ø 267 to 273 mm insulators, is
properly installed on a Ø 64 mm or 76 mm pole, with swivel eye and
through the single sheave or double sheave. The latter is used in large
C
strings or heavy insulators, thus forming the trolley pole assembly.
The scoop coupled to the stick is mounted under the first top insulator of
the string for removal and horizontal movement for maintenance, and to
return it to the original position.
TROLLEY POLE
Insulating Approx.
Catalog Ø Weight
Length
Reference (mm)
(m) RH4723-2
kg lb
RH4721-112 64 3.51 9.50 20.94
RC400-0546 76 3.51 13.80 30.42
COMPONENTS
Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
RH4723-2 Fork Suspension Tool Attachment for Ø 64 mm pole 6.40 14.11
RH4723-4 Single Trolley Wheel with Ø 64 mm pole clamp 3.60 7.94 RH4723-4
RC400-0152 Tandem Trolley Wheel with Ø 64 mm pole clamp 7.30 16.09
NOTE
SUSPENSION STRING - The fork suspension tool, tandem trolley and
trolley pole set is for a rated load of up to 400 daN (880 lb), however the
following procedures should be observed in its application:
1. Always use tandem pulleys with 64 mm collar (RC400-0152).
2. The recommended trolley pole size for this load is Ø 64 mm
(RH4721-112).
3. The maximum distance between the trolley pole attachment points on
the structure to prevent excessive bending is 2 m.
4. The coupling of the Ø 64 mm Tandem Trolley collar to the fork RC400-0152
suspension tool must be within 500 mm of the scoop center.

C

GROUP D
TEMPORARY JUMPERS
Insulated Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Temporary Jumper
Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Insulated Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Temporary Fuse Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Copper Ferrule for Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Insulated Hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Bypass Clamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Temporary Switching Tool Device . . . . . . 131
Temporary Jumper Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Temporary Crossarm Big Jumper. . . . . . . 132
Jumper Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Temporary Crossarm Big Jumper

Circular or Double-T Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Transformer Bushing
Temporary Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Temporary Bypass for Fuse Switch . . . . . 134
Transformer Bushing Clamp . . . . . . . . . . 129 Mobile Switch-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

GROUP D
TEMPORARY JUMPERS
INSULATED CABLE
Extremely flexible, even at low temperatures, this cable has combinations of
covers and insulation resistant to abrasion, oil, heat, moisture, and ozone.
Its characteristic color is natural from its EPR - ethylene - propylene based
coating.
For easy identification and classification, voltage and size (in AWG) are
recorded over the entire length of the cable at regular spacings.
The conductor consists of extra-flexible copper filaments.
INSULATED CABLE
Approx.
Cable
Catalog Rated Voltage Cross Section Copper Conductor Maximum Current Weight /m
Size
Reference (kV) (mm²) Rated Ø (mm) Capacity (A)
(AWG)
kg lb
R3641 15 35 2 8 200 0.77 1.70
R3861 15 50 1/0 10 250 1.40 3.09
FLV30182-1 35 50 1/0 10 250 1.70 3.75
R3863 15 70 2/0 12 300 1.70 3.75
R3866 15 95 4/0 15 400 2,35 5,18
TEMPORARY JUMPERS 123 TEREX RITZ

INSULATED CLAMP
It is suitable for rubber glove interventions in energized installations
up to 25 kV.
It is connected to the conductor by manual twisting, to close and open the
jaw, which will mount to the conductor firmly and safely.
It is connected to the jumper cable via a copper ferrule (RC600-2598 to
RC600-2601 series), which must be purchased separately.
The clamp body is constructed with orange thermoplastic protection and
bronze alloy jaws.
D This tool is designed to work with 2 AWG to 4/0 AWG cable size
variations.
It has a rated current conduction capacity of: 400 A.
INSULATED CLAMP
Approx.
Clamp Connection Capability
Catalog Maximum Current Weight
Description
Reference Capacity (A)
01 pair of clamps with insulating # 6 Copper 477 MCM CAA

RG4765 400 2.50 5.51
protection for bypass Ø 4 mm Ø 22 mm
01 clamp part with insulating protection # 6 Copper 477 MCM CAA

RT601-0039 400 1.25 2.76
for bypass Ø 4 mm Ø 22 mm
COPPER FERRULE FOR CABLES

Plain Threaded Terminal
It is designed for cable connections to protected clamps (RG4765) and
bypass clamps (RC600-1743/RG3622-1).
One of its ends has a 5/8” thread, with nut and lock washer, the other has
an internal cavity to mount and then press the jumper cable.
PLAIN THREADED TERMINAL

Burndy Matrix Approx.
Catalog Compression Weight
Application No. or
Reference Number
equivalent
kg lb
RC600-2598 2 AWG cable 0.12 0.26
RC600-2599 1/0 AWG cable U 165 0.12 0.26

2
RC600-2600 2/0 AWG cable 0.14 0.31
RC600-2601 4/0 AWG cable U 166 0.15 0.33
TEREX RITZ 124 TEMPORARY JUMPERS

BYPASS CLAMP
It is made of aluminum alloy and bronze alloy eyescrew suitable for hot
stick work with the aid of a RITZGLAS® hot stick.
TWISTING CLAMP FOR BYPASS

Approx.
Clamp Connection Capability
Catalog Weight
Reference
RG3622-1
RG3622-1
900 MCM CAA
Ø 29 mm
0.70 1.54 D
#6 Copper
Ø 4 mm 1590 MCM CAA
RC600-1743 0.72 1.59
Ø 38 mm
TEMPORARY JUMPER SETS

RC600-1743
Temporary bypass is a common practice for interventions on energized
installations of up to 15 kV. It can be performed from a distance, with the
aid of maneuvering rods or rubber glove methods.
All temporary jumpers use two copper ferrules (RC600-2598 to
RC600-2601 series), one at each end of the cable to connect the clamps.
15 kV TEMPORARY JUMPER
RUBBER GLOVE INSTALLATION WITH CLAMP RT601-0039
Clamp
Approx.
Cable Size
Length (m)
Connection
Cap. (A)
Current
Overall
Rated
(AWG)
Catalog Weight
Range
Reference
RC601-0171 2 200 5.20 11.46
RC601-0172 1/0 477 260 6.70 14.77

#6 Copper
MCM CAA 3.70
Ø 4 mm
RC601-0173 2/0 Ø 22 mm 300 7.80 17.20
RC601-0174 4/0 400 10.20 22.49

HOT STICK INSTALLATION WITH CLAMP RG3622-1
Current Cap. (A)

Clamp Connection
Approx.
Size (AWG)
Length (m)
Capability
Overall
Weight
Cable
Catalog
Rated
Range
Reference
FLV17443-1 3.70 4.80 10.58

2 200
FLV17443-5 4.60 5.50 12.13
FLV17443-2 3.70 7.10 15.65

D 1/0 260
FLV17443-6 900 4.60 8.40 18.52
#6 Copper
MCM CAA
Ø 4 mm
FLV17443-3 Ø 29 mm 3.70 8.30 18.30
2/0 300
FLV17443-7 4.60 9.80 21.61
FLV17443-4 3.70 10.70 23.59

4/0 400
FLV17443-8 4.60 12.80 28.22
HOT STICK INSTALLATION WITH CLAMP RC600-1743
Clamp Connection
Current Cap. (A)

Approx.
Size (AWG)
Length (m)
Capability
Overall
Weight
Cable
Catalog
Rated
Ragne
Reference
RT601-0281 3.70 4.50 9.92

2 200
RT601-0282 4.60 5.20 11.46
RT601-0283 3.70 6.90 15.21

1/0 260
RT601-0284 1590 4.60 8.10 17.86
#6 Copper
MCM CAA
Ø 4 mm
RT601-0285 Ø 38 mm 3.70 8.00 17.64
2/0 300
RT601-0286 4.60 9.50 20.94
RT601-0287 3.70 10.40 22.93

4/0 400
RT601-0288 4.60 12.60 27.78

JUMPER SUPPORTS
Pole-mounted with a chain strap, it is designed to support jumpers cables.
Constructed with Ø 64 x 1,22 m RITZGLAS® tube.
Composed of four swivel collar clamps, provided with an internal device to
prevent the jumper from slipping, avoiding its contact with the ground.
Each collar has a cable clamping capacity between 19 and 38 mm in
diameter.
The rated working capacity on each collar is 34 daN (75 lb).
D
JUMPER TEMPORARY SUPPORTS
Approx.
Catalog Weight.
Description
Reference
kg lb
RC601-0013 Pole-mounted Temporary Support for Jumper Sets 11.30 24.91
TRANSFORMER BUSHING
TEMPORARY JUMPER
Cap. de Correne
Comprimento
Cabo (AWG)
Nominal (A)
Using this tool is a standard practice in interventions in energized medium

Total (m)
Bitola do
voltage installations for replacement and/or repair operations of

components installed between the transformer bushings and the network,
both from a distance and in rubber glove with the hot line.
Arranged in two mounting versions (both built with 14.6 kV - 2 AWG size
shielded cable).
TRANSFORMER BUSHING TEMPORARY JUMPER

Approx.
Catalog 2 AWG Rated Current Weight
Description
Reference cable (m) Capacity (A)
kg lb
With protective device

FLV17448-1 5.80 12.79
(FLV05784-1)
3.50 100
FLV17449-1With fuse
FLV17449-1 8.10 17.86
switch (RC600-1895)

FLV17448-1
Catalog
Item Quant. Unit. Description
Reference
01 01 pc FLV11179-2* Transformer bushing clamp
02 01 pc RG3403 Twisting clamp
03 3,5 m R3641 15 kV shielded cable - 2 AWG size
04 01 pc FLV05784-1 Jumper protection device
05 1 pc RS1600-7 Insulated hanger
D
FLV17449-1
Catalog
Reference
01 01 pc FLV11179-2* Transformer bushing clamp
02 01 pc RG3403 Twisting clamp
03 3,5 m R3641 15 kV shielded cable - 2 AWG size
04 01 pc RC600-1895 Fuse switch
NOTES
* The arrangements provided considered a FLV11179-2 clamp model (for
rubber glove mounting method). A FLV11179-1 clamp type with eyescrew,
for installation with the hot stick method.
Cable length may change depending on installation configuration.

TRANSFORMER BUSHING CLAMP
It is designed to be installed directly on the transformer bushing in
energized installation interventions.
Available in four models, which are unique regarding their jaw clamping
devices and one is designed for angled operation.
- FLV11179-1/ FLV11179-4 FLV11179-1
It has an eyescrew and is clamped using a hot stick.
- FLV11179-3 / FLV11179-5
Its jaws are driven by the “T” type screw and mounted by rubber glove. D
- FLV11179-2 / FLV11179-6
It has a Ø 25 X 0.21 m insulated grip, with a rubber drip pan. It is installed FLV11179-4
by rubber glove.
TRANSFORMER BUSHING CLAMP

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb FLV11179-3
FLV11179-1 With eyescrew 0.80 1.76
With eyescrew.
FLV11179-4 0.80 1.76
Outbound cable outlet
FLV11179-3 With “T” type screw 0.80 1.76
With “T” type screw. FLV11179-5

FLV11179-5 0.80 1.76
Outbound cable outlet
FLV11179-2 With insulated RITZGLAS® grip 0.80 1.76
With insulated RITZGLAS® grip.

FLV11179-6 0.80 1.76
Outbound cable outlet FLV11179-2
FLV11179-6

TEMPORARY JUMPER PROTECTION DEVICES
It consists of a fuse holder cartridge with aluminum coupling terminals
used as a temporary transformer bushing jumper component.
The clamp (RG3622-1) is mounted to the tool head from one of its hands
and to the 2 AWG jumper cable from the other.
NOTE
The fuse link is not included and must be selected and installed by the
user. High performance fuse links are recommended.
D
TEMPORARY JUMPER PROTECTION DEVICES
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Rated Current Capacity (A)
Reference
kg lb
FLV05784-1 100 0.80 1.76
TEMPORARY FUSE SWITCH

It is designed to maintain protection during interventions on conventional
distribution network fuse switches, as a temporary transformer bushing
jumper component.
This switch is mounted and removed with a hot stick.
Its lower end bronze pin is for temporary jumper connection. The Ø 32 mm
RITZGLAS® pipe with two rubber skirts ensures insulation.
NOTES
- Fuse links are not supplied with the fuse switch and must be purchased
by third parties with a maximum capacity of 100 A.
RC600-1895 - Opening this switch under a load requires the use of a loadbuster
device
- The temporary pivot lever fuse switch allows is designed to close on the
opposite side of the fuse holder using a hot stick.
TEMPORARY FUSE SWITCH

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description Voltage Class
Reference
kg lb
RC600-1895 Standard 4.10 9.04

up to 27 kV
RC600-1944 Pivot lever 4.40 9.70
RC600-1944

INSULATED HANGER
It is used for temporary jumper installation on phase-to-phase, energized
lines up to 34.5 kV. Its insulating support holds one end of the jumper
without energizing it for safe handling and mounting on the other end.
It is fixed to the conductor by a twisting clamp with eyescrew using the hot
stick.
INSULATED HANGER
Approx.
Catalog
Description
Weight D
Reference
kg lb
RS1600-7 Insulated support for temporary jumper up to 34.5 kV 1.00 2.20
TEMPORARY SWITCHING TOOL DEVICE

A device designed for the safe and economical temporary sectionalizing of
circuits in distribution networks up to 24 and 36 kV, by de-energizing
specific sections for maintenance.
The operation consists of mounting this tool on 1/0 to 336.4 MCM
conductors (Ø 10 to 18 mm) with hot line working procedures at
predetermined points. This will allow releasing de-energized sections for a
short period for maintenance.
Installation should always be performed close to the structure and with hot
line procedures.
For increased operational safety, the three temporary switching tool device
must not be mounted in alignment with the adjacent tool.
This tool has the same characteristics as the conventional disconnect
switch, with insulated components, so it is suitable for this type of
intervention.
It can be opened under a load, using a loadbuster device.
TEMPORARY SWITCHING TOOL DEVICE

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Temporary switching tool device with

FLV13917-1 5.20 11.46
voltage class up to 24 kV
Temporary switching tool device with voltage

FLV30047-1 5.50 12.10
class up to 36 kV

TEMPORARY CROSSARM BIG JUMPER
The big jumper temporary crossarm is designed for emergency
interventions or power supply to temporary consumers for a specified
period.
Constructed with Ø 64 mm x 1.30 m long RITZGLAS® tube, it has three
fuse switches with a maximum current capacity of 100 A, a pole mounting
system with two steel screws and a wing nut. It can be used on
installations up to 27 kV.
NOTE
D The fuse link is not included and must be selected and installed by the
user. High performance fuse links are recommended.
BIG JUMPER TEMPORARY CROSSARM

Approx.
Catalog Weight
FLV13033-1 Description
Reference
kg lb
A big jumper temporary crossarm provided with three

FLV13033-1 22.60 49.80
temporary fuse switches
ACCESSORY
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
FLV13045-1 Reference
kg lb
FLV13045-1 Temporary fuse switch for big jumpers up to 27 kV 4.50 9.90

TEMPORARY CROSSARM BIG JUMPER
CIRCULAR OR DOUBLE-T POLE
It is designed for emergency interventions or power supply to temporary
consumers for a specified period. It also has a mounting system for circular
or square poles.
- FLV29780-1
It has three fuse switches with a maximum current capacity of 100 A. It can
FLV29780-1
also be used in installations up to 27 kV.
- FLV30049-1 D
It has three disconnect switches, with a maximum current capacity of 400 A
and three insulated jumpers, with 95mm² size, three-meter cable and a
maximum capacity of 400 A. It can also be used in installations up to 27 kV.
TEMPORARY CROSSARM BIG JUMPER CIRCULAR OR DOUBLE-T POLE

Approx.
Catalog Weight
DESCRIPTION
Reference
kg lb FLV30049-1
FLV29780-1 Temporary crossarm for big jumper with fuse switch 26.40 58.20
Temporary crossarm for big jumper with disconnect

FLV30049-1 45.00 99.20
switch

TEMPORARY BYPASS FOR FUSE SWITCH
A device designed for temporary release of fuse switch cartridges. It
creates an alternate current path for fuse link replacement on various
switch types up to 27kV.
Installed with a hot stick, its end eyescrew provides a significant number of
operating possibilities.
Available in spring-loaded or bolt drive opening and closing models.
TEMPORARY BYPASS FOR FUSE SWITCH

D
Opening
Approx.
Voltage Rated Capacity
Catalog Opening and Weight
Class Current (mm)
Reference Closing System
(kV) (A)
Min. Max. kg lb
FLV12409-1 Clamp bolt 25 280 442 1.47 3.24
FLV29374-1 Spring-loaded 15 100 338 478 0.78 1.72
FLV29374-2 Spring-loaded 27 449 572 0.85 1.90

FLV12409-1
FLV29374

MOBILE SWITCH-OFF
An equipment used on hot line techniques for switching and insulating
lightning arresters and voltage transformers for maintenance, testing, or
replacement on hot lines with 69 to 500 kV voltages.
It is designed for safe intervention, without switching off the transmission
line. The entire solution was designed for easy field assembly by hot line
crews while maintaining the routine use of insulated scaffolding and safety
distances.
An insulated modular scaffold is required and must be purchased
separately.
D
MAIN ADVANTAGES
- Increased power availability from utilities.
- Increased operational flexibility for maintenance teams.
- Reduced labor costs.
- Reduced equipment downtime in the electrical system.
MOBILE SWITCH-OFF
Catalog
Description
Reference
Mobile switch-off for intervention on energized lines with voltages from

FLV28201-1
69 to 230 kV
Mobile switch-off for intervention on energized lines with voltages from

FLV18171-1
230 to 500 kV
FLV28201-1 (2.35 m)
FLV18171-1 (2.89 m)
1.00
FLV18171-1 (11.45 / 6.45 m)
FLV28201-1 (6.70 / 4.70 m)

BASIC CHARACTERISTICS
Switching and actuation assembly - integration of key components with the
following characteristics:
- Operating capacity from 69 kV to 500 kV.
- Contact rated current: 1200 A.
- Lightning impulse withstand voltage: 1050 kV.
- Opening and closing time: 1.5 s.
- Supply Voltage: 220 V.
- Remote opening and closing with radio frequency control.
- Lever for manual emergency switching.
D
1 Scaffolding is mounted with an open

disconnect switch 2 The first jumper is connected to LV
3 The second jumper is

connected to LV 4 Disconnect switch is closed
5 Jumpers are disconnected

from LV equipment 6 Disconnect switch is opened
7 The second jumper is removed and

maintenance is performed.

SUGGESTED SCAFFOLDING LAYOUT
6m 11 m
Unit Reference Description
Qty. Qty.
1 1 pc FLV18169-1 Lifting brackets FLV18169-1 | FLV18169-2
1 1 pc FLV18169-2 Lifting brackets
1 1 pc FLV17173-1 Active part
1 1 pc FLV18158-1 Switching rods
- 2 pc FLV18158-2 Switching rods FLV17173-1

D
1 1 pc FLV18158-5 Switching rods
2 4 pc FLV17172-1 Rod support bearing
1 1 pc FLV18170-1 Gearmotor assembly
FLV18158-1
1 1 pc FLV18161-1 Control box including wired and wireless remote
1 1 pc FLV21133-1 Switch-off storage
1 1 pc FLV21130-1 Gearmotor storage
FLV18158-2
SUGGESTED SCAFFOLDING LAYOUT

6m 11 m
Unit. Reference Description
Qty. Qty.
250 250 m RM1895-3 Rope FLV18158-5
2 2 pc FLV16237-1 Intermediate safety crosspiece
2 5 pc FLV15444-1 Removable scaffolding step
4 8 pc FLV04803-3 Rope insulated separator
4 8 pc FLV23916-1 Stake FLV17172-1
1 1 pc FLV17444-1 1 m x 2 m platform
2 2 pc FLV09091-1 2 m scaffolding module
5 10 pc FLV16241-3 Ø 38 mm x 1.40 m diagonal crosspiece
4 4 pc FLV16241-1 Ø 38 mm x 1.00 m Lower side crosspiece FLV18170-1
10 20 pc FLV06052-1 1 m scaffolding module
1 1 pc FLV11630-1 Scaffolding casters
1 1 pc FLV11658-1 Rail set for scaffolding base
FLV18161-1

D

GROUP E
LADDERS, PLATFORMS
AND SCAFFOLDS
Hot Line Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Accessories for Ladder Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Adjustable Ladder Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ladder with Double siderail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Insulating Spacer for Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Insulating Stool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Insulating Modular Scaffold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

GROUP E
LADDERS, PLATFORMS
AND SCAFFOLDS
HOT LINE LADDER
Hot line ladders have many applications in high voltage energized
interventions, as they allow electricians to work in a convenient position
and perform line repairs in almost inaccessible locations.
All hooks in these ladders are made of surface-treated steel, with
Ø 25.4 mm (1”), and swivel to adapt to many positions on the structure.
For increased operational safety, the hooks features a surface-treated steel
chain and locking device.
The rungs in these ladders are made of Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® tubes with
non-slip coating.
Besides the excellent bonding process between rails and rungs, the ladder
have steel rods installed near the ends.
Single Ladders with Hook

RH4903-8 to RH4903-12 series ladders are made of Ø 38 mm
RITZGLAS® tubes. RH4904-8 to RH4904-16 series ladders are built with
Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tubes, which make up their rails. All of them are
used exclusively for vertical work.
The ladders (RH4905-8 to RH4905-20 series) are made of Ø 64 mm
RITZGLAS® poles, which make up their rails, preferably used for
horizontal work.
LADDERS, PLATFORMS AND

SCAFFOLDS 141 TEREX RITZ
LADDERS WITH Ø 38 mm SIDERAILS
Reference of Approx. Weight
Insulation Distance between
Catalog
Length (m) Rungs (m)
(8” Hook) kg lb
RH4903-8 2.39 11.00 24.25
RH4903-10 3.00 0.30 12.90 28.44
RH4903-12 3.61 14.90 32.85

Reference of Approx. Weight
Catalog
E (8” Hook)
kg lb
RH4904-8 2.39 20.80 45.86
RH4904-10 3.00 22.90 50.49
RH4904-12 3.61 0.30 24.40 53.79
RH4904-14 4.22 26.20 57.76
RH4904-16 4.83 28.60 6305

Catalog Approx. Weight
Reference
(8” Hook) kg lb
RH4905-8 2.39 28.60 63.05
RH4905-10 3.00 31.00 68.34
RH4905-12 3.61 33.00 72.75
RH4905-14 4.22 0.30 37.20 82.01
RH4905-16 4.83 38.70 85.32
RH4905-18 5.44 42.00 92.59
RH4905-20 6.05 43.40 95.68
Rated working capacity:

Ladders with 8” hooks (0.20 m): 567 daN (1250) lb.

TEREX RITZ 142 SCAFFOLDS
Sectional Ladders with Hooks
They are made with Ø 64 mm RITZGLAS® tubes, which make up their
siderails and allow length combinations up to 9.76 m.
All sections are interchangeable to reach different heights with a few
sections. Their lengths are suitable for transportation.
The top sections have steel hooks, and sections are connected with steel
sleeves (with surface treatment and copper alloy cotter pins) for perfect
locking.
TOP SECTION Ø 64 mm
Approx.
Catalog
Weight
Reference Insulating Length (m)
(8” Hook)
kg lb E
RC402-0482 3.00 30.60 67.46
RC402-0402 3.61 33.00 72.75
RC402-0404 4.22 35.40 78.04
RC402-0407 4.83 37.80 83.33
RC402-0411 6.05 42.60 93.92
MIDDLE SECTION Ø 64 mm
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Insulating Length (m)
Reference
kg lb
RT402-0423 2.96 22.00 48.50
BOTTOM SECTION Ø 64 mm
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Insulating Length (m)
Reference
kg lb
RC402-0418 2.39 19.60 43.21
RC402-0421 3.00 22.00 48.50
RC402-0422 3.61 24.40 53.79

One-Siderail Sectional Ladder
It is designed for vertical work so electricians can access conductors in
de-energized suspension chains without the need to support the chain
itself. This avoids possible insulator breakage accidents.
It is made with a Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tube, which makes up its center
rail, and Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® tube rungs.
All sections are interchangeable so different heights can be reached with
the 3 sections. Their lengths are suitable for transportation.
The upper section has 14” rotating steel hooks and sections are
connected with steel sleeves (with surface treatment and bronze cotter
pins) for perfect locking.
All sections have a storage and transportation bag.
E
ONE-SIDERAIL SECTIONAL LADDER
Capacity
Approx.
Insulating Rated
Catalog Weight
Length Section Storage Bag Approx.
Reference
(m)
daN lb kg lb
FLV18198-1 1.45 Upper FLV18232-1 9.30 20.50
FLV18199-1 2.32 Intermediary FLV18232-2 120 265 8.60 18.96
FLV18200-1 2.24 Base FVL18232-2 8.75 19.29
FLV18198-1
FLV18199-1
FLV18200-1

ACCESSORIES FOR LADDER SUPPORT
The ladder support set is designed for quick, easy, and safe mounting of
an energized work ladder in almost every type of structure.
They are designed to be coupled to metal, wood, or concrete structures, in
vertical or horizontal positions, with Ø 64 mm rail or higher.
Components can be purchased separately or as replacement parts.
The diagram below shows a typical installation and workloads with
different anchor points.
Hoist or other lifting device
Swivel Stick E
RE402-0138
X
Assembly Set
5 m (maximum) Load
Maximum total
“X” = Distance between workload Ladder Total
mounting points (m) Length (m)
kg lb
2.44 227 500 4.88
3.66 182 400 7.32
4.88 132 290 9.75
NOTE
For assemblies requiring ladders higher than 5 m, an additional support set
must be installed.

SET FOR VERTICAL ASSEMBLY ON METALLIC STRUCTURE
Approx.
RE402-0092*
RE402-0141*
Weight
RE402-0525
RE402-0099
RE402-0138
RE402-0568
Catalog
Reference
kg lb
RC402-0139 1 1 1 2 2 1 27.64 60.94

RE402-0525
* See other models.
SET FOR HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLY ON METALLIC STRUCTURE

E Approx.
RE402-0092*
RE402-0141*
Weight
RE402-0087
RE402-0099
RE402-0138
RE402-0568
Catalog
Reference
RE402-0087
kg lb
RC402-0140 1 1 1 2 2 1 27.89 61.49
* See other models.
COMPONENTS TO SUPPORT THE LADDERS

RE402-0099 Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
RE402-0525 Saddle for vertical attachment on metallic structure 11.25 24.80
RE402-0087 Saddle for horizontal attachment on metallic structure 11.50 25.35
RE402-0526 Base of the vertical pole attachment saddle 11.09 26.21
RE402-0099 Spreader Bar 3.80 8.38

RE402-0138
RE402-0138 Ø 64 mm clamp for rod 0.79 1.74
RE402-0568 Ladder support with 64 mm clamp 6.60 14.55
RE402-0569 Ladder support with 51 mm clamp 6.50 14.33
RE402-0568
DOUBLE CLAMP
Approx.
Catalog Ø Weight
Reference (mm)
kg lb
RE402-0092 64 / 38 1.30 2.87
FLV03550-2 64 / 32 1.20 2.65
FLV03550-6 64 / 76 1.50 3.31
FLV03550-7 38 / 51 1.35 2.98

RE402-0092

Ø 32 mm SWIVEL STICK
Rated Work Approx.
Catalog Insulating Length Capacity Weight
Reference (mm)
daN lb kg lb
RE402-0141 3512 3.90 8.60
RT402-0899 1712 1.90 4.19

1588 3500
RT402-0900 2312 2.50 5.51
RT402-0901 2912 3.20 7.05
E
ADJUSTABLE LADDER HOOKS
It is easily adapted to the rail of the hot line ladder and platform ladder.
This installation can be used to convert a ladder with Ø 51 or 64 mm rails
into a hooked ladder or to mount ladders on tilted structures.
The hooks are easily mounted with their clamps and can freely rotate,
allowing them to be placed in the most convenient position on the
structure.
Constructed of galvanized steel, with Ø 25.4 mm (1”) and mounted on an
aluminum collar clamp. Complementary hook steel chains have a safety
locking device.
COMPOSITION OF ADJUSTABLE LADDER HOOKS
- 01 Steel hook;
- 01 Steel chain and its safety locking device;
- 01 Aluminum alloy clamp.
LADDER ADJUSTABLE HOOKS

Rated
Working Approx.
Catalog Reference
Ø Capacity per Weight
Side Rails pair
(mm)
8” hook 14” hook 18” hook
daN lb kg lb
(203 mm) (356 mm) (457 mm)
RH4904-1 - - 567 1250 4.70 10.36

51
- RH4924-1 - 454 1000 5.60 12.35
RH4905-1 - - 567 1250 4.80 10.58
- RH4925-1 - 64 454 1000 5.70 12.57
- - RH4945-1 340 750 6.60 14.55

LADDER WITH DOUBLE SIDERAIL
It made of RITZGLAS® tubes and designs for hot line work, in installations
up to 500 kV.
The single and extension ladders are fitted with a rubber-coated nylon
strap and fixed rubber shoes.
Trapezoidal ladders are equipped with aluminum terminals and 8” hooks for
overhead work. They should not be used horizontally.
All ladders are supplied with transport and storage bags.
NOTES
- Extension ladders must be braced through its eye bolts mounted at the
top of the base element.
- Required bending tests must be performed with a maximum length of
E 8.50 meters.
SINGLE LADDER
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Rated Length (m) Qty. of Rungs
Reference
kg lb
ES/LV-28-CN-SB 2.80 8 11.00 24.25
ES/LV-37-CN-SB 3.70 11 14.00 30.86
ES/LV-46-CN-SB 4.60 14 20.00 44.09
ES/LV-59-CN-SB 5.90 18 21.00 46.30
Width between siderails: 293 mm.

Distance between rungs: 305 mm.
EXTENSION LADDER
Approx.
Rated Length (m)
Catalog Weight
Qty. of Rungs
Reference
Retracted Extended kg lb
EE/LV-96-CN-SB 5.32 9.14 29 45.50 100.31
EE/LV-108-CN-SB 5.93 10.36 33 49.50 109.13
EE/LV-120-CN-SB 6.84 12.19 39 53.50 117.95
Width between siderails: Base - 293 mm.

Tip - 295 mm.

TRAPEZE LADDER WITH 8” HOOKS
TO SUSPENSION
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Rated Length (m) No. of Rungs
Reference
kg lb
ET/LV-28 2.80 9 22.60 49.80
ET/LV-37 3.70 12 25.30 55.70
ET/LV-46 4.60 15 27.00 59.50
ET/LV-59 5.90 19 30.00 66.10
Width between siderails: 365 mm.

E
INSULATING SPACER FOR LADDERS

It is designed to be coupled to double-rail ladders, to prevent them from
contacting grounded parts of the pole, especially in rubber glove or hot-
stick working up to 15 kV.
Made of RITZGLAS® poles and aluminum/bronze fittings, this tool is
attached to the pole with a tie rod tightener.
Main dimensions: 550 x 290 mm.
NOTE
Using this tool requires specific procedures.
INSULATING SPACER FOR LADDERS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV14717-1 Insulating spacer for ladders 6.60 14.55

PLATFORM
They are designed with RITZGLAS® tubes to provide the electrician with a
safe and convenient base for rubber glove and hot-stick work.
It can be quickly mounted to structures so that the electrician is vertically
and horizontally well positioned.
These platforms quickly mount to the structure using two options:
- Fixed mount
For works that do not require frequent platform side position changes. The
platform is fixed to the pole with the chain stretcher or to the structure
through jaws.
- Pivot type
E It allows the electrician to rotate 180° horizontally on the mounted platform
and position it at left or right intermediate angles.
The board is 250 mm wide and is made of fiberglass, with non-slip floor
surface, preventing accidental slips.
Its handrail and tripod are a support and mounting point for the safety belt
fall arrest device.
Designed for pole mounting. To be mounted on metal structures, it must be
fitted with its exclusive saddles, as shown in the platform accessory tables.
Insulating Platform
It includes a 0.30 m insulation between the board and the pole-mounted
saddle through two Ø 51 mm RITZGLAS® tubes, so the insulating
platforms can be used in rubber glove and hot-stick operations in
energized lines up to 34.5 kV.
Rated working capacity: 227 daN (500 lb).
INSULATING PLATFORM - 1.80 m

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV17436-1 With pivot saddle and handrail 39.80 87.74

Aerial Platforms
It is designed for work in hot-stick work.
AERIAL PLATFORMS - 1.80 m

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RH4964-6W With fixed pole mount and handrail 34.60 76.28
Suspension Platform
E
It allows 180° rotation in the horizontal plane, so electrician can better
position the platform without disassembling for further adjustments. It is
commonly used in structures with reduced space where a conventional
platform cannot be mounted.
Rated working capacity is 181 daN (400 lb) in aligned position and
perpendicular to the structure. Capacity is reduced to 136 daN (300 lb)
when positioned at any different angle.
SUSPENSION PLATFORM
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RT402-0030 With fixed pole mount and tripod 28.10 61.95
Platform Saddle
Designed for situations where the electrician needs a footrest on the pole
for height-limited ladders.
Made of aluminum alloy and adjusted to the pole with a chain stretcher for
final tightening.
PLATFORM SADDLE
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV06423-1 Footrest platform saddle 3.40 7.50
NOTE
Due to their constructive characteristics, the utility platform and the saddle
platform are not insulating.

Ladder Platform
It allows the electrician to work from a standing or sitting position, for
better positioning on the structure.
It consists of a 1.20 m RITZGLAS® ladder and a fiberglass platform with a
0.25 x 0.51 m non-slip surface. When provided with adjustable hooks, they
are used to be mounted to the structure.
This platform can be folded for easy transport and storage.
PLATFORM LADDER
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
E kg lb
RC402-0277 With suspension hook 28.50 62.83
INSULATING STOOL
An equipment that helps the electrician in insulating from ground potential,
as it extends the electrician's work area and safety in interventions in
substations, switchgears, electrical panels.
- Made of polyethylene;
- Reduced weight providing greater transportation and handling comfort;
- Non-slip surface floor;
- Rated working capacity: 120 daN (265 lb);
- Orange color.
INSULATING STOOL
Approx.
Size (m)
Rated Weight
Catalog
Working
Reference
Voltage (kV)
Non-slip Floor Height kg lb
FLV21504-1 0.50 x 0.50 0.32 40 4.05 8.93

INSULATING MODULAR SCAFFOLD
Equipment required for interventions in high and extra-high voltage
electrical installations, mainly substations.
This scaffold is provided with insulating connections and has
interchangeable modules with aluminum connection modules.
BENEFITS
- Reduced modules weight;
- Easier mounting;
- Isolating components immune to the corona effect.
It provides a condition of access and positioning to the electrician at

heights necessary for the most diverse types of bare-hand and hot-stick
works. The development of new components has greatly expanded the E
mounting options for the insulating scaffold. It also allowed compliance
with the NR-18 standard requirements (brazilian standard).
Made of lightweight, interchangeable, snap-on parts, assembly is easy,

simple, and quick. It can also be performed by only two electricians,
without requiring additional tools.
Its structure is made with RITZGLAS® tubes, with electrical and

mechanical properties in accordance with the IEC-60855 and
ASTM F 711 standards. So it can be used in energized installations up to
800 kV, ensuring full electrical insulation and a rated working capacity of
up to 300 daN (660 lb) at the center of the platform.

RITZGLAS® Insulating scaffolds - Assembling options
01 Base, Column, and Platform: 02 Base and Column: 1.0 x 1.0 m 03 Base and Column: 1.0 x 1.0 m
1.0 x 1.0 m Platform: 2.0 x 1.0 m Two Platforms: 2.0 x 1.0 m
Side Extension: 1.0 m
04 Two Columns: 1.0 x 1.0 m 05 Base and Column: 2.0 x 2.0 m 06 Base, Column, and Platform: 2.0 x 2.0 m
Platform: 4.0 x 1.0 m Reduced to: 1.0 x 1.0 m
Platform: 2.0 x 1.0 m
Side Extension: 1.0 m

MAIN COMPONENT
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
1.0 x 1.0 m module with cast aluminum connection

FLV06052-1 made of Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tubes. It has non-slip 7.00 15.43
rungs and locking cotter pins FLV06052-1

FLV09091-1 made of Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tubes. It has non-slip
rungs and locking cotter pins
12.20 26.90
E
FLV09091-1

made of Ø 38 mm RITZGLAS® tubes. It has non-slip
FLV13916-1 13.60 29.98
rungs, locking cotter pins and 5 upper pins for mounting
in unconventional arrangements.
FLV13916-1
Side crosspiece made with RITZGLAS® tube
Ø 38 mm x 1.0 m and cast aluminum plug heads for
FLV16241-1 0.89 1.96
lateral closing and locking of the modules in the
1.0 x 1.0 m base scaffolding assemblies
Side crosspiece made with RITZGLAS® tube

Ø 38 mm x 2.0 m and cast aluminum plug heads for
FLV16241-2 2.20 4.84
lateral closing and locking of the modules in the
2.0 x 2.0 m base scaffolding assemblies
FLV16241-1
Diagonal crosspiece made with Ø 38 mm x 1.4 m
RITZGLAS® tube and cast aluminum coupling heads,
FLV16241-3 1.50 3.31
used for diagonal locking between two modules for
1.0 x 1.0 m base scaffolds

FLV16241-4 2.00 4.41
used for diagonal locking between two modules for

FLV16241-5 2.40 5.29
used for diagonal locking between two modules for FLV16241-3

MAIN COMPONENT
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
Platform made of 4 fiberglass planks with non-slip

FLV17444-1 surface, used only for 2.0 x 1.0 m scaffold base 26.40 58.20
assemblies
FLV17444-1
E
assemblies
FLV17444-2

assemblies
FLV17444-3
Rope insulating stick made with RITZGLAS® tube

Ø 25 mm x 1.70 m, (1.54 m insulating length). It has an
aluminum head and a steel butt-swivels, a tool necessary
FLV04803-3 1.15 2.54
for scaffolding bracing (using 4 parts for each 4-meter
high span is recommended). Its rated working capacity
is 800 daN / 1764 lb
FLV04803-3
White polypropylene multifilament rope, twisted on three

0.07 0.15
RM1895-3 legs in 220 m rolls, Ø 1/2”. It is used in series with
(/m)
insulating spacer for scaffolding
RM1895-3

MAIN COMPONENT
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
FLV05992-1 Scaffold leveling jack 3.50 7.70
FLV05992-1
Set of 4 scaffolding casters

1.0 x 1.0 m base. Equipped with stabilizing shoes
FLV11630-1 108.40 238.98
108.40 238.98 and 2 steel rods for spacing and locking
the scaffold base
E E
A set of 4 casters to move the base scaffolding
2.0 x 1.0 m. Equipped with stabilizing shoesand 2 steel
FLV11630-2 108.40 238.98
rods for spacing and locking the 108.40 238.98 scaffold
base
FLV11630-1
Set of 4 scaffolding casters

2.0 x 2.0 m base. Equipped with stabilizing shoes
FLV11630-3 110.60 243.83
110.60 243.83 and 2 steel rods for spacing and locking
the scaffold base
Rail set for scaffolding base with:

1.0 x 1.0 m and 2.0 x 1.0 m; hot-dip galvanized steel
(3 pairs of 2.0 m each); connected to each other
FLV11658-1 103.10 227.30
through locking pins and their steel rods; spacers for
easy horizontal mobility of the scaffolding in courtyards,
especially in substations where paving is uneven
Rail set for scaffolding base with:

2.0 x 2.0 m; hot-dip galvanized steel (3 pairs of 2.0 m FLV11658-1
each); connected to each other by means of a locking
FLV11658-2 104.30 229.94
pin and steel tie rods; spacers for easy horizontal
movement of the scaffolding in courtyards, especially in
substations where paving is uneven

COMPONENT MEETING NR-18 BRAZILIAN STANDARD
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
1.0 x 1.2 m railing module with cast aluminum

connection. It has the same insulating and mechanical
FLV16238-1 characteristics as the other modules, but with a height of 8.30 18.30
1.2 m. It is used exclusively at the work levels where the
platform will be mounted
FLV16238-1
2.0 x 1.2 m railing module with cast aluminum
E FLV17496-1
connection. It has the same insulating and mechanical
characteristics as the other modules, but with a height of 13.80 30.42
1.2 m. It is used exclusively at the work levels where the
platform will be mounted
Intermediate crossarm made with Ø 38 mm x 1.0 m

RITZGLAS® pole and collars at its ends. It is used for
FLV16237-1 lateral closing of the scaffolding railing modules. 2.30 5.07
2.0 x 1.0 and 1.0 x 1.0 m, mounted 0.7 m high from the
FLV17496-1 platform, providing greater user safety
Intermediate crossarm made with Ø 38 mm x 2.0 m

RITZGLAS® tube and collars at its ends. It is used for
FLV16237-2 side closure of the 2.0 x 2.0 m scaffolding rail modules, 2.90 6.39
mounted 0.7 m high from the platform, providing greater
safety for the user.
FLV16237-1
Side rail made of Ø 38 mm x 1.0 m RITZGLAS® tube

and cast aluminum snap-on heads, responsible for side
FLV16241-6 0.89 1.96
closing and locking the railing modules in 1.0 x 1.0 and
1.0 x 2.0 m scaffold assemblies
Side rail made of Ø 38 mm x 2.0 m RITZGLAS® tube

FLV16241-6 and cast aluminum socket heads, responsible for side
FLV16241-7 2.20 4.48
closing and locking the railing modules in 2.0 x 2.0 m
scaffolding assemblies

COMPONENT MEETING NR-18 BRAZILIAN STANDARD
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
Safety baseboard with mounting fittings to the scaffolding

modules for installation on the base of the 1.0 x 1.0 m
FLV14342-1 8.00 17.64
platform as a safety item in order to prevent accidental
tool or component drops
FLV14342-1
FLV14342-2 12.30 27.12
E

FLV14342-3 16.00 35.37

ACCESSORIES
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
0.50 x 1.0 m module, with the same insulating and

mechanical properties as the other modules. However,
FLV09012-1 4.90 10.80
this module is designed to obtain intermediate heights
by providing its user with proper working positioning.
FLV09012-1
A scaffolding pole made of Ø 3/8” x 3.0 m
RITZGLAS®. It has a fork head at one end and an eye
ESC15051-1 head at the other end (both aluminum) couple two rods. 0.70 1.54
E If required, its rated working capacity is
500 daN (1102 lb)
A scaffolding pole made of Ø 3/8” x 2.0 m

If required, its rated working capacity is
500 daN (1102 lb)
ESC15051-1 A scaffolding pole made of Ø 3/8” x 1.0 m

If required, its rated working capacity is
500 daN (1102 lb)
Bracing strap made of cast bronze alloy. They have an

FLV17648-1 hinged eye to couple the rope insulating stick. It is 0.40 0.88
always installed in the scaffolding connections
FLV17648-1
Removable step for side mounting of scaffolding

FLV15444-1 modules as a way to provide side steps where there is 3.70 8.16
only a span
FLV15444-1

ACCESSORIES
Approx. Weight
Catalog
Description
Reference
kg lb
Heavy component lifting support, mounted on the upper

right scaffolding module for easy lifting of heavy
components. They have an axial angle of approximately
FLV18169-1 40 degrees in relation to the module that allows two 2.00 4.41
supports to be mounted simultaneously for lifting larger FLV18169
materials with a maximum load
capacity of 60 daN (132 lb)
Heavy component lifting bracket, installed on top left

FLV18169-2 scaffolding module, with maximum load capacity of 2.00 4.41 E
60 daN (132lb)
FLV18269-1
Lift support. For easy lifting of its components during

FLV18269-1 assembly and tools. Installed on the top scaffolding 1.10 2.43
module with maximum load capacity of 40 daN (88 lb)
FLV18375-1
A tool box made of fiberglass. It has two metal cast

aluminum clips for mounting to the scaffolding module.
FLV18375-1 Suitable for safe and convenient tool placement during 4.90 10.80
scaffolding maintenance Main dimensions:
0.62 x 0.22 x 0.20 m
FLV23916-1
FLV23916-1 Galvanized steel rod 1.60 3.50
Micro tester and micro ammeter used for leakage

current measurement in scaffolding electric field tests.
RC402-0288 It has a scale from 0 to 200 µA, supplied with clips, 3.26 7.19 RC402-0288
connection cable, a metal frame fixing device and a
storage box.
Digital microammeter used for leakage current

measurement in scaffolding field electric tests. It has a
MD800 3.12 6.88
scale from 0 to 800 µA, supplied with clips, connection
cable, a metal frame fixing device and a storage box.
MD800

E

GROUP F
INSULATING
COVER-UP EQUIPMENT
Application, Handling Secondary Conductor
and Conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Cover (LV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Pole Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Compact System Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Locking Device for Covers . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Transformer Bushing Cover . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Round Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Insulating Covers for Maintenance

Works on Energized Substations . . . . . . . 175
Crossarm Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Insulated Rubber Blanket. . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Pole Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Cover Pegs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fuse-Switch and Switch Cover . . . . . . . . 170
Permanent Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Conductor, Pin and
Disc Insulator Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Removable Protective Cover . . . . . . . . . . 180
GROUP F
INSULATING F
COVER-UP EQUIPMENT
APPLICATION, HANDLING AND CONSERVATION
Hot line protective covers are one of the main protective equipment for
interventions in low and medium voltage energized installations.
They are designed to electrically protect the entire work area in order to
prevent accidental phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground contacts during
service.
They are used in rubber glove work in energized lines and must be installed
with rubber insulating gloves or with from a distance, as they have metallic
brackets (eyebolts) for hot sticks.
They should only be used by suitably trained electricians for hot line work and
requires the following basic rules to be observed:
1. Under no circumstances should the electrician touch the covers except with
rubber gloves. Therefore, the electrician should always be aware of his/her
position in relation to them to avoid accidentally touching them..
This rule is valid for any other Cover used to protect energized parts.
2. Protective covers for poles, crossbars, horizontal supports, C-support, and

round covers are designed to prevent accidental contact of energized
conductors or cable ties with grounded surfaces of the structure.
INSULATING COVER-UP EQUIPMENT 165 TEREX RITZ

3. Protective covers should be handled with care to avoid breaking,
cracking, or scratching and should always be kept clean and dry.
4. Each protective cover should be carefully inspected prior to use for

cracks, deep scratches, deformation, or other damage, and to check
that they are clean and dry.
If necessary, it must be cleaned only with cotton fabrics. If dirt cannot

be completely removed, use mild soap and water.
5. Unlike permanent protective covers, which will be addressed at the end

of this group, protective covers are designed for temporary use to
perform a variety of hot line maintenance tasks, and must be removed
after the service.
CAUTION
Hot line protective covers are designed for a wide variety of power system
maintenance situations, and we provide appropriate covers for each type
F of equipment for increased efficiency and safety.
The electrician must carefully select the most suitable covers and in the
necessary amounts, to avoid dangerous improvisations before any task.
A visual inspection of the covers for cracks, deep scratches, dirt,

deformations, etc. is imperative for all hot line teams, because user safety
depends on perfect equipment maintenance. When in doubt, the covers
must not be used and sent for electrical testing.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Hot line protective covers are made of high dielectric, UV, and ozone
resistant thermoplastic.
Its orange color allows excellent visualization of the area under intervention.
Protective covers for hot stick work have metallic brackets for stick
operation.
TEREX RITZ 166 INSULATING COVER-UP EQUIPMENT

POLE COVERS
It is used for insulating protection for pole mounting or changing
operations.
They have internal ribs, an important detail to prevent surface abrasions
during handling, decisively extending their useful life, with polypropylene
rope handles for easy mounting and removal with insulating gloves.
Models with 1200 and 1800 mm lengths have a nylon button to couple two
or more units to protect a longer pole length.
COVER FOR POLES UP TO Ø 150 mm

Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Reference
A B C kg lb
RC406-0548 300 0.70 1.54

150 ~115
RC406-0549 600 1.20 2.65 F
Rated voltage 36.6 kV (phase/phase)

Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Reference
A B C kg lb
RM4937-1 300 1.00 2.20
RM4937-2 600 1.95 4.30

230 ~195
A
RM4937-4 1200 3.95 8.71
RM4937-6 1800 5.95 13.12

Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Reference
B
A B C kg lb
RC406-0028 300 1.15 2.54

C
RC406-0029 600 2.35 5.18
300 ~115
RC406-0030 1200 4.85 10.69 polypropylene rope
RC406-0000 1800 7.20 15.87

LOCKING DEVICE FOR COVERS
- RC406-0547
An accessory designed to keep the pole cover firmly fastened, including
flat locations.
Easy to install and remove, it has a locking device for its rope and, with can
be released by pulling the eye ring with a stick.
Approx. Weight 0.75 kg (1.65 lb)
ROUND COVERS
Due to their versatility, these covers are used to protect pole ends, braces,
F crossarm, lightning arresters, etc.
As its application is not specific, each use deserves special care in order
to ascertain the real protection that the cover offers.
It has a polypropylene rope strap for easy installation and removal with
insulating gloves.
ROUND COVER
Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Reference
A B C kg lb
COB11176-1 300 0.40 0.88
COB11176-2 600 0.80 1.76

100 ~196
COB11176-3 900 1.20 2.65
COB11176-4 1200 1.60 3.53

A
COB04487-1 300 0.50 1.10
COB04487-2 600 0.90 1.98

150 ~135
COB04487-3 900 1.30 2.87
COB04487-4 1200 1.80 3.97

CROSSARM COVERS
Its main application is to prevent the contact of cable ties with the
crossarm in pin insulator or post insulator replacement operations.
They can also be used to hold the temporary jumper or conductor over the
crossarm. Conductors must be protected with an appropriate covers.
RM4933
Three models are available, one for crossarms with pin insulator and others
for crossarms with post insulator.
CROSSARM COVERS
Approx.
Catalog Length Weight
Description
Reference (mm)
kg lb COB11173-1
RM4933 With pin insulator 610 1.45 3.20
COB11173-1 With post insulator 570 1.50 3.31
COB11173-2 Short type, with post insulator 430 1.10 2.43

F
COB11173-2
Crossarm End Cover

It is used to protect crossarm ends against accidental contact with the
cable tie during mounting or removal.
With the rubber glove method this cover also helps to prevent the
electrician from contacting the earth potential.
The RC406-0102 can be used on crossarms with pin or post insulators as RC406-0102
it has a bolt groove for double crossarm mounting.
CROSSARM END COVERS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
COB14780-1
RC406-0102 Crossarm end cover 1.25 2.75
COB14780-1 Crossarm end cover 0.71 1.57
COB10765-1 Cover for disconnect switch housing 0.68 1.50
COB10765-1

POLE TOP COVER
It is used to protect pole tops during cable tie installation and removal
operations.
It adapts to poles up to Ø 254 mm. It has an elastic rope for better
mounting.
POLE TOP COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RC406-0097 Pole top cover 2.10 4.63
FUSE-SWITCH AND SWITCH COVERS

It is used as protection in structures with fuse or disconnect switches, and
can be installed using rubber glove and hot-stick methods.
The RC406-0009 cover is secured by a pin that locks it behind the
insulator and rests on the metal switch bracket.
Model COB28494-1 is wrapped around the two insulator shrouds, which
are compressed in place.
RC406-0009 The COB13345-1 cover is used for insulating protection between the
disconnect switch housing and live parts during jump installation and
removal operations or other work on the switch. Designed for 15 and 23
kV networks, it consists of two flat plates, which, when half-open, can be
wrapped around the base of the insulators and locked by insulating nuts.
FUSE-SWITCH AND SWITCH COVERS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
COB28494-1 Description
Reference
kg lb
RC406-0009 Protective cover for fuse switch 2.80 6.17
COB28494-1 Protective cover for disconnect switch 2.90 6.39
Protective cover for disconnect switch housing 2.004.41

COB13345-1 2.00 4.41
(365 x 880 mm)
COB13345-1

CONDUCTOR, PIN AND DISC INSULATOR
COVERS
Conductor Cover
It provides a greater protection area in energized parts and therefore the
most commonly used in hot line work
Available in many models to suit various types of electrical installations with
rated voltages up to 48.3 kV.
Their ends are provided with a male/female fitting, for firm connections
with two or more units or other models, such as pin insulator covers and
disc insulator covers.
Specifically, RP406-0184/RC406-0181GA/RC406-0514GA also allow
connections with rubber conductor covers.
The metal eye ring clips are designed to mount the covers on the network
with a hot-stick.
F
Specifically for covers RP406-0184 and COB03335-1, this is an option for
users who wish to mount them using the rubber glove method.
With a universal head mounted at the end of this stick, the mounting angle
of the cover can be pre-adjusted.
Pin Insulator Cover

They are designed to protect an energized conductor next to a pin or post
insulator, and are normally used with conductor covers to which they can
be coupled through standard fittings.
One of its sides can be adjusted for better a fit in many crossarm widths.
There are several models available, which vary according to application
and operating voltage.
Some have metallic brackets for hot-stick work, and others have no
metallic brackets for rubber glove work.
Disc Insulator Cover

It establishes protection of live parts near disc insulators in anchor chains.
They have fittings on both ends, one to couple to the insulator and the
other to couple to the conductor cover. Some are equipped with a metallic
bracket for the hot-stick work and an elastic strap for better mounting of
the edges.
Applicable for both conventional and polymeric insulators.

COVER SET CONDUCTOR / PIN INSULATOR / DISC INSULATOR
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Application Description
Reference
RP406-0184 kg lb
For rubber glove work

RP406-0184 Conductor For conductors up to Ø 25 mm 1.50 3.31
RC406-0181GA Approx. length 1.560 mm
Metallic bracket for hot-stick
For hot-stick work
RC406-0181GA Conductor For conductors up to Ø 25 mm 1.60 3.50
Approx. length 1.560 mm
153 mm Height with metallic bracket

RC406-0182 Pin Insulator 1.10 2.43
for hot stick
RC406-0182L
RC406-0182L Pin Insulator 1.20 2.65
for hot stick
RC406-0164 Disc Insulator Protection for discs up to Ø 254 mm 4.30 9.48

RC406-0164
COVER SET CONDUCTOR / PIN INSULATOR

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
RC406-0514GA kg lb
For hot-stick work

RC406-0514GA Conductor For conductors up to Ø 25 mm 2.15 4.74

RC406-0557 Pin Insulator 1.10 2.43
for hot stick

RC406-0557L Pin Insulator 1.40 3.09
RC406-0557L for hot stick
Rated voltage 36.6 kV (phase/phase
COVER SET CONDUCTOR / PIN INSULATOR / DISC INSULATOR

COB03335-1
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
kg lb
RM4946
Metallic bracket for hot-stick For rubber glove work
COB03335-1 Conductor For conductors up to Ø 25 mm 0.90 1.98
For hot-stick work

RM4946 Conductor For conductors up to Ø 25 mm 1.25 2.76
RM4947 RM4947 Pin Insulator With Metallic bracket 0.70 1.54
Dead end, polymer, porcelain rigid

COB11400-1 Pin Insulator 1.30 2.87
and disc insulators up to Ø 160 mm
COB11400-1

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
kg lb

COB08835-1 Conductor Mounting to conductors up to Ø 25 mm. 2.50 5.51 COB08835-1
RM4948 Disc insulator With metallic bracket for hot stick 2.95 6.50
RM4948
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Reference
kg lb
RM4931 Conductor
Mounting to conductors up to Ø 45 mm. 4.20 9.26
F
RM4931
With metallic bracket for hot stick

RC406-0046 Pin insulator 3.90 8.60
work
RC406-0046
SECONDARY CONDUCTOR COVER (LV)

It was designed for temporary mounting in secondary networks, in order to
avoid accidental human or tool contacts with low voltage conductors
during maintenance around the pole or even in medium voltage work.
One of its great advantages is that it is lightweight and can be coupled
with other units of the same type through its male-female system, to
insulate long extensions.
This cover has no metallic brackets, so it must be mounted in the network
with the rubber glove method.
SECONDARY CONDUCTOR COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
For secondary network conductors (LV) up to Ø 25 mm

COB03333-1 0.45 0.99

COMPACT SYSTEM COVERS
Designed for protection of the CDS (Compact Distribution Systems)
supports, when replacing pin insulators. Available in two models: for
horizontal supports and C-supports.
Each model consists of two overlapped parts, fully protecting the supports.
The COB11050-1 cover is specifically designed for spacer cable systems
COB11047-1 to protect conductors near the lozenge-shaped spacer.
It is used with conductor covers in spacer cable systems, to which it is
coupled through end fittings.
CDS SUPPORT AND LOZENGE SPACER COVERS

Approx.
COB11170-1 Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
COB11047-1 For horizontal supports 1.25 2.76
F COB11170-1 For C-supports and pin insulators 1.10 2.43
COB11170-2 For C-supports and post insulators 1.25 2.76
COB11170-2 COB11050-1 For lozenge-shaped spacers 0.70 1.54
Square- Rated voltage 26.4 kV (phase/phase)

on-point
CDS PIN INSULATOR COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
COB11051-1 For pin insulator with clip 0.80 1.76

COB11050-1
CDS CONDUCTOR COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
For spacer cable system conductors up to Ø 25 mm.

COB11147-1 0.90 1.98
COB11051-1 Approx. length 880 mm
TRANSFORMER BUSHING COVER

COB11147-1
It is designed for insulating protection of the transformer bushing assembly
and temporary jumper for transformer bushings. A protective cover made
of rigid polyethylene with high dielectric strength, resistant to ozone and
UV.
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
COB30064-1 COB30064-1 Transformer bushing cover 0.78 1.70

INSULATING COVERS FOR MAINTENANCE
WORKS ON ENERGIZED SUBSTATIONS
The insulating cover set consists of:
- Side Guard;
- Cover for fixed contact of the disconnect switch;
- Straight cover for buses;
- Adapter and mounting head protect adjacent circuits, fixed disconnect
contacts and buses, providing a safe working condition and preventing
accidental contacts with energized parts.
The versatility of this set offers protection for disconnect switches of: 630
A and 1250 A - one-pole and 1250 A - three-pole, and others.
Quick mounting and unmounting with conventional hot stick.
- COB11612-1 / COB22404-1
SIDE GUARD
Mounted on adjacent bays closest to the gantry to be insulated, providing
F
full protection to the operator and the work area. Mounted to the structure
by removable fiberglass hooks, for different installation positions. COB11612-1
- COB11617-1 / COB20663-1
COVER FOR DISCONNECT SWITCH FIXED CONTACT
It is designed to insulate the fixed contact of the disconnect switch. It has
removable and adjustable mounting hooks for different types of switches,
as well as different truss dimensions.
- COB11622-1 / COB20664-1
STRAIGHT COVER FOR BUSES
Similar to the conductor cover for hot line work. It offers a wide protection
range when insulating energized buses up to Ø 58 mm near the work area. COB11617-1
- RM4455-84
It is provided with a thumbscrew to couple to a universal head, allowing the
change of the installation angle of a tool.
- FLV11623-1
An aluminum mounting head, with fiberglass poles, is used with universal
COB11622-1
adapter for mounting and removal of covers and insulating guards.

INSULATING COVERS FOR MAINTENANCE WORKS ON ENERGIZED SUBSTATIONS
Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
Comp. Height kg lb
COB11612-1 Substation side guard 730 1430 7.05 15.54
Cover for fixed contact of Ø

COB11617-1 620 500 2.65 5.84
250 mm disconnector switch
COB11622-1 Straight bus cover 750 200 0.70 1.54
INSULATING COVERS FOR MAINTENANCE WORKS ON ENERGIZED SUBSTATIONS

F Approx.
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
Comp. Height kg lb
Insulating covers for maintenance

COB20663-1 works on energized substations 660 660 5.98 13.18
Ø 250 mm
COB20664-1 Straight bus cover 750 250 1.30 2.87
ACCESSORIES
RM4455-84 Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RM4455-84 Universal adapter 0.11 0.24
FLV11623-1 Installation head 0.15 0.33
FLV11623-1

INSULATED RUBBER BLANKET
It is designed to protect electricians from accidental contact with energized
parts in the structure during live line maintenance.
It is versatile and allows covering components with typically irregular
LR-4/II
shapes, such as: disconnect switches; secondary racks; pin insulators;
anchor chains; crossarms, etc.
Made of a special rubber and resistant to ozone and corona effects.
These blankets are orange, type II (ozone resistant), in three versions:
solid, slotted, and three-slot.
The solid and slotted models have 28 holes across their perimeter and the
LR-SP-4/II
three-slot model has 11 holes for mounting to energized components using
special buttons (LIR-BLR).
Another mounting option is using cover pegs (see specific product page).
The slotted model has one 26.7 ± 1 mm slot and the three-slot model is
18 mm wide for coupling with smaller folds.
F
LR-TP-4/II
INSULATED RUBBER BLANKET

Approx.
Approx. Voltage of Test Nominal Test Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description Dimensions Working Voltage Thickness
Reference
(mm) (kV) (kV) (mm)
kg lb
+10 +10
LR-4/II Solid 900 x 900 3.90 8.60
-5 -5
+10 +10
LR-SP-4/II Slotted 900 x 900 36 40 4.00 3.80 8.38
-5 -5
+10 +13
LR-TP-4/II Three slot 900 x 1100 4.86 10.71
-5 -6
PLASTIC BUTTON*
Catalog
Description
Reference
LIR-BLR Plastic button to fix rubber blankets
* Plastic buttons are not supplied with the blanket, so they must be ordered separately
LIR-BLR

COVER PEGS
The cover pegs without steel eyes (FLV16886-1) is designed for rubber
glove work on blankets and covers.
The cover pegs with steel eyes (FLV16886-2) is designed for hot-stick
work on blankets and covers.
COVER PEGS
FLV16886-1
Approx.
Catalog Length Weight
Description
Reference (mm)
kg lb
Manual plastic peg for rubber glove

FLV16886-1 240 0.12 0.26
work
FLV16886-2 Plastic peg with ring for hot stick work 240 0.16 0.35
FLV16886-2
F
PERMANENT COVERS
They are made in rigid black thermoplastic and are resistant to ultraviolet
rays and electrical tracking and are suitable for hot-stick and rubber glove
hot line use.
Covers for Stirrup Connector

Designed for 14.6 kV class, protected distribution line stirrup connectors
and clamps.
STIRRUP CONNECTOR AND HOT LINE CLAMP COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Protective cover for hot line stirrup connectors and

COB14959-1 0.95 2.09
clamps, black color, permanent use
Rated voltage 14.6 kV (phase/ground)

COB14959-1
Shunt Connector Cover

Designed for wedge tap connectors on protected, 14.6 kV class
distribution lines. Rubber glove work only.
SHUNT CONNECTOR COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Protective cover for wedge tap connector, black color,

COB13559-1 0.10 0.22
permanent use
COB13559-1
Rated voltage 14.6 kV (phase/ground)

Transformer Bushing Covers
The bushing cover are used for protection of the transformer terminals on
distribution systems, class 14.6 kV, preventing short-circuiting, mainly
related to birds and other small animals.
- COB11721-1
It can be easily installed with specific plastic fasteners, available in one COB11721-1
single model for several brands and models of transformers.
- COB18644-1
It can be installed on several sizes of cables.
- COB24863-1
For cables Ø 25 mm and Ø 15 mm.
TRANSFORMER BUSHING COVERS

Approx.
Rated Voltage
Weight
Catalog
Reference
Basic Dimensions
(mm)
Phase/Ground
COB18644-1 F
(kV)
kg lb
Ø 114 mm
COB11721-1 14.6 0.13 0.29
total height 157 mm
Base Ø 108 mm
COB18644-1 Body Ø 87 mm 14.6 0.11 0.24
Total height 211 mm
Ø 73 mm
COB24863-1 25 0.13 0.29
Total height 200 mm
COB24863-1
Cover for Structure-Mounted Disconnect Base

It is designed for protection between the disconnect switch housing and
energized parts. Permanent use avoids short circuit caused mainly by the
contact of birds and other animals.
SHUNT CONNECTOR COVER

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
COB19874-1 Protective cover for disconnect switch housing 4.80 10.60 COB19874-1
Rated voltage 14.6 kV (phase/ground).

REMOVABLE PROTECTIVE COVER
Designed to protect energized circuits up to 38 kV phase/phase, avoiding
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground contact, which can be accidentally
caused by animals, generating possible shutdowns.
They are made of flexible plastic and specially molded on demand for the
most different types and application conditions, such as: connector, splice,
bus, and bushing in medium voltage structures. It can be quickly installed
on these components and fastened with nylon clips.
These covers are fully reusable and can be removed and reinstalled for
inspections in structural components.

GROUP G
INSTRUMENTS
Phase Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Contact Tester - CSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Insulator Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Contact Tester - Underground System . . . 190
Ritz Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Contact Tester - Direct Current . . . . . . . . 191
Microammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Multi-Purpose Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Hot Line Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Super Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Contact Tester. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Glove Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

GRUPO G
INSTRUMENTS G
PHASE TESTER
A portable equipment for easy and safe phase sequence determination and
comparison, as well as AC, phase-to-phase, or phase-to-ground voltage
readings in 1 kV to 80 kV transmission and distribution circuits.
The basic unit is comprised of a 1 kV to 16 Kv direct reading galvanometer

and a 6.50 m reel with 6,50 m of 16 kV shielded cable, mounted on two
RITZGLAS® sticks, which are high impedance units required for readings
on the instrument.
Voltages above 16 kV require extensions (RH1876-4 for 48 kV and

RH1876-2 for 80 kV). These extensions are coupled to the threaded end of
the instrument stick for indirect reading, that is, x3 full scale for 48 kV and
x5 full scale for 80 kV.
A pair of extensions must be used for 48 kV (RH1876-4) and two pairs for
80 kV (RH1876-2). Length of each unit: 630 mm.
The Calibration Device (H1876/B-AFT) is designed to calibrate the phase

detector before use, especially after a long inactivity period. It generates a
digital signal to the phase detector so that the user can compare the
galvanometer reading with the value on the calibration device display.
This Calibration Device must be ordered separately.
Power supply: 9V battery
INSTRUMENTS 183 TEREX RITZ

RH1876
PHASE TESTER
Aprox.
Catalog Weigh
Description
Reference
kg lb
G RH1876-1
RH1876
Complete phase tester kit for phases up to 16 kV, including
detector, case, two universal sticks, bag for universal sticks, 10.90 24.03
and instruction manual
630 mm (2 ft) RH1876-1 Phase tester and case for 16 kV only 8.35 18.41
RH1876-2 Resistor extension kit for 80 kV Phase Detector 2.84 6.26
RH1876-4 Resistor extension kit for 48 kV Phase Detector 1.42 3.13

RH1876-4
H1876/B-AFT Phase tester calibration device 1.00 2.20
ACCESSORY
Aprox.
Catalog weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RH1760-1 Ø 32 mm Universal stick and 1.75 m insulated length 1.30 2.87
H1876/B-AFT
TEREX RITZ 184 INSTRUMENTS

INSULATOR TESTER
A portable device designed to quickly locate a faulty isolator in the insulator
chain in hot distribution and transmission circuits.
Its working principle is based on measuring the potential difference in the
tested insulator disc. A high impedance galvanometer indicates this
potential difference for comparisons with other isolator discs in the same
system. Thus, a defective isolator will show a reading considerably lower
than the others.
It can be used to evaluate pin insulators, one piece isolators, multipart pin
insulators, and disc insulators.
It is made of fiberglass tubing and housing, with quick and multiangular
adjustment of contact tips. The insulator tester is designed to test any
insulator measurement and to make other adjustments for better viewing.
The instrument has a 3-position switch on its backside to change sensitivity
for a better selection of pointer range.
The calibration device is designed to check the insulator tester before use,
especially after a long inactive period.
It generates a digital signal to the insulator to compare the values shown in
the calibration display and the insulator tester galvanometer reading.
G
The set consists of: instrument, case, and instruction manual.
INSULATOR TESTER
Aprox.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Insulation tester in distribution and transmission systems

TILV-16/DT 1.13 2.49
of up to 500 kV
TILV-16/AFT Digital calibration for insulator tester 1.00 2.20
TILV-16/DT
TILV-16/AFT

RITZ TESTER
A portable device for periodic electrical testing of hot line insulated poles,
hot sticks and poles, hot line ladders and insulated scaffolds that detects
the leakage current caused by moisture, cracks, and impurities on or inside
the insulated poles.
Operation is easy and simple, and only requires a single operator, through
the direct contact of the Ritz Tester with the surface to be tested, indicating
a “PASS” or “FAIL” graph, according to the leakage current of the tested
element.
This instrument simulates the test specified in the ASTM F-711 standard. A
test carried out by the Ritz Tester offers a guarantee that the equipment is
ready for use. It can not be used as a reporting test.
There are four versions available:
LS-80
- LS-80 / LS-81 / RT-110 / RT-220
Models LS-80 and LS-81 (standard sizes), RT-110 and RT-220 (reduced
sizes) perform electrical tests corresponding to an applied voltage of 100
kV in 30 cm according to the standard. To perform the test, the stick must
be supported horizontally on two easels.
G - LS-80/WD / LS-81/WD
These models can be used for electrical tests on wet and dry sticks
through a key switch on the front panel of the instrument. In the wet
function, an electrical test corresponding to a voltage of 75 kV in 30 cm is
reproduced. And the dry function corresponds to a voltage of 100 kV in 30
cm.
RT-110 To better instruct users on this operation, a DVD with use instructions is
provided with the Wet/Dry Ritz Tester.
RITZ TESTER
Aprox. weight
Catalog Dimensions
Description Instrument Case
Reference (mm)
kg lb kg lb
LS-80 For 110 V

200 x 365 x 310 5.30 11.68 5.20 11.46
LS-81 For 220 V
RT-110 Reduced model, 110 V

155 x 250 x 250 3.40 7.50 2.80 6.17
RT-220 Reduced model, 220 V
LS-80/WD WET/DRY, for 110 V

200 x 365 x 310 5.30 11.68 5.20 11.46
LS-81/WD WET/DRY, for 220 V

MICROAMMETER
A device that measures leakage current of insulated structures in direct
contact with the hot line.
It is designed to measure and monitor leakage current in insulating
structures such as ladders, scaffolds, man basket insulated arms, among
others.
Analog Micro Ammeter (RC402-0288)

It measures leakage currents of up to 200 µA.
Digital Micro Ammeter (MD800)

It measures and monitors leakage currents of up to 800 µA.
RC402-0288
The maximum allowed leakage current value for the structure to be
monitored can be set on the MD800 and sound and light will be emitted if
the leakage current value is higher than the value set on the device.
Designed to operate on insulating structures that are in contact with
transmission lines of up to 500kV
G
MICROAMMETER
Aprox.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Analog Microammeter to measure leakage currents of up to

RC402-0288 1.50 3.30
200 µA
MD800
Digital Microammeter to measure and monitor leakage currents
MD800 3.12 6.88
of up to 800 µA

HOT LINE TESTER
Electronic instrument to detect the absence of alternating voltage in
distribution lines, substations, and transmission lines, with bare
conductors.
It is required due to the high voltage spikes when system power is
restored. Thus, the electrician can carry out safety procedures while the
Instrumento para Medium tensão
system is de-energized.
Developed in accordance with the IEC61243-1 international standard, it
includes an operation testing system and standby status
High voltage instrument
HOT LINE TESTER

Aprox.
G Catalog Operation Voltage Applicable Instrument weight*
Voltage Ranges
Reference Frequency Class Standard / Review Color
kg lb
NHL 10-40 10 kV - 40 kV Medium Orange
NHL 20-80 20 kV - 80 kV 60 Hz High-medium IEC61243-1/09 Orange 0,72 1,59
NHL 60-240 60 kV - 240 kV High Black
*Weight without packaging
The clamp mounted instrument model can be used in bare conductor

networks or compact networks.
NHL 10-40/GR
HOT LINE TESTER

Aprox.
Catalog Operation Voltage Applicable Instrument weight*
Voltage Ranges
Reference Frequency Class Standard / Review Color
kg lb
NHL 10-40/GR 10 kV - 40 kV 60 Hz Medium IEC61243-1/09 Orange 0,75 1,65
*Weight without packaging

CONTACT TESTER
A contact AC voltage detector instrument, designed for use with a switch
stick. The electronic circuit offers a safe and accurate response through
light and sound indications.
Tested in accordance with international standard IEC 61243-1/09 and
indispensable for compliance with the Safety Regulatory Standard in
Low and medium
Electrical Installations and Services NR-10 (Item 10.5.1-C - verification of voltage instrument
absence of voltage).
The contact tester offers fast and safe voltage checks in AC installations in:
- Transmission lines;
- Distribution lines;
- Substations;
- Switchgears.
The CT 0.07-1 model has an on/off switch, the others are stand by
High voltage instrument
CONTACT TESTER
Aprox. G
Catalog Voltage Operation Voltage Applicable Instrument Weight*
Reference Ranges Frequency Class Standard / Review Color
kg lb
CT 0,07-1 70V - 1 kV Low - Brown 0.29 0.63
CT 2-8/SB 2 kV - 8 kV Low IEC61243-1/09 Orange 0.29 0.63
CT 3,8-36/SB 3,8 kV - 36 kV Medium IEC61243-1/09** Orange 0.29 0.63
CT 10-40/SB 10 kV - 40 kV 60 Hz Medium IEC61243-1/09 Orange 0.29 0.63
CT 20-80/SB 20kV - 80 kV Medium-high IEC61243-1/09 Orange 0.42 0.92
CT 60-240/SB 60 kV - 240 kV High IEC61243-1/09 Black 0.42 0.92
CT 180-540/SB 180 kV - 540 kV High IEC61243-1/09 Black 0.42 0.92
*Weight without packaging.

** Does not comply with Item - 4.2.1.2 THRESHOLD VOLTAGE - of the IEC61243-1 standard. It complies with the other requirements of the
standard.

CONTACT TESTER - CSU
An instrument used to check live circuits for voltage. It contains sound and
light indicator signals. This equipment model signals the presence of
voltage only when the equipment electrode is in contact with the hot point
to be tested.
Thanks to its universal fitting head, this model can be used for other
functions such as disconnecting fuse switches. Its pole is subjected to the
tensile test with the same strain as the hot stick.
CONTACT TESTER - CSU

Aprox.
Catalog Voltage Operation Voltage Applicable Instrument Weight*
Reference Ranges Frequency Class Standard/ Review color
kg lb
CT-CSU-3.8-36/SB 3.8 kV - 36 kV -
60 Hz Medium Orange 0,65 1,43
CT-CSU-10-40 10 kV - 40 kV IEC61243-1/09
G *Weight without packaging.
CONTACT TESTER - UNDERGROUND SYSTEM

An AC voltage detector designed to detect voltage in elbow and straight
connectors in underground networks. Its contact electrode has been
designed to cap and uncap these types of connectors for testing.
- Voltage range: 2 kV to 6 kV - or as suggested by the customer;
- Stand-by equipment;
- Light and sound indication of voltage;
- Built-in self-test circuit;
- Elbow contact electrode;
- Universal adapter for hot stick or pole.
CONTACT TESTER - UNDERGROUND SYSTEM

Aprox.
Catalog Voltage Weight
Description
Reference Range
kg lb
Voltage detector for disconnect

capacitor terminals.
CT-RS/C 2-6 350 V to 1 kV 0.34 0.75
Output ratio of 1/10 to 1/12 rated
voltage.

CONTACT TESTER - DIRECT CURRENT
Voltage detector designed for contact voltage detection. Two-pole
equipment where a clamp is grounded and the electrode is used to detect
voltage at the desired point.
- Voltage range: 500 V - 5 kV;
- Equipment with on/off/test switch;
- Light and sound indication of voltage;
- Universal adapter for hot stick or pole;
- Built-in self-test circuit with cable test circuit.
DC VOLTAGE DETECTOR
Aprox.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
CT-CC 0.5-5 500V to 5 kV ranges. 1.10 2.43

G
MULTI-PURPOSE TESTER
Designed to safely for contact and no-contact voltage detection in
alternating current electrical installations with unshielded conductors. It is
ideal for distribution lines, substations, and switchgears.
MULTI-PURPOSE TESTER
Aprox.
Catalog Weight
Voltage Range Model
Reference
kg lb DMU (with switch)
110 V - 600 V contact

DMU-15 With on/off switch
601 V - 15 kV non-contact
DMU-25 110 V - 25 kV With on/off switch 0.30 0.66
DMU-36/SB 220 V - 36 kV Stand-by
DMU (stand-by)

SUPER TESTER
A non-contact voltage detector designed for use with a hot stick or pole.
The electronic circuit provides accurate and reliable indications through
visual and audible signals.
This device can safely detect voltage from 1 kV in alternating current
installations such as transmission and distribution lines, substations,
switchgears, etc., with unshielded conductors.
It is indispensable in maintenance services on electrical installations so the
electrician can be sure that the work place is de-energized, thus enabling
the installation of the temporary grounding set, which will ensure the
necessary safety to perform the tasks.
SUPER TESTER
Aprox.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Non-contact high voltage one-pole detector in the range

H1990/ST-138
of 1 to 138 kV
G 1.00 2.20
Non-contact high voltage one-pole detector in the range
H1990/ST-800
of 1 to 800 kV
-- Suitable for indoor and outdoor use;
- Built-in operation test;
- Simultaneous sound and light dual signal;
- Encapsulated electronic circuit immune to temperature differences from
-10 °C to 60 °C;
- LED indicator for perfect device operation and battery charge condition
- Packaging: synthetic material case;
- Universal adapter for hot stick;
- Dimensions: 180 x 100 x 90 mm;
- Operation: By proximity to the electromagnetic field;
- Alarm Signal: Light - through 4 front LEDs;
Sound - through piezoelectric transducer;
- Work Frequency: 50 / 60 Hz;
- Power supply: 9 V battery - average duration for uninterrupted work
15h.

GLOVE TESTER
A rugged, easy-to-handle test instrument. It can be operated manually via a
pneumatic pump or connected to a compressed air source.
Their use is indispensable in visual inspections of rubber insulating gloves,
completely inflating them in order so damages that could compromise
insulation properties are immediately detected.
Rubber insulating gloves deserve special care, including periodic visual
inspection prior to use, and periodic electrical testing as they are subject to
tears, punctures, and cuts. These damages severely compromise their
insulating properties and endanger the user.
The glove tester is an instrument specially designed for a safe and
thorough visual inspection of rubber insulating gloves on the job site or
testing laboratory, evenly inflating them so surface damages can be
detected, however small they may be.
Ideal for testing gloves of all tension classes.
GLOVE TESTER
Aprox.
Catalog
Description
Weight G
Reference
kg lb
FLV11404-1 Glove tester 7.75 17.09

G

GROUP H
BARE-HAND EQUIPMENT
Conductive Suits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bare-hand Working Chair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Inspection Trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Bare-Hand Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

GROUP H
BARE-HAND EQUIPMENT
CONDUCTIVE SUITS H
Specially designed for work on extra high voltage transmission lines and
substations up to 800 kV. It allows the electrician to equalize his/her
potential with the electric field of the energized point where the work will
be performed.
The conductive suits works based on the Faraday Cage principle, making
maintenance work on energized systems safe and comfortable.
Made of high-tech polyamide fabric lined with cotton and silver microfiber
and reinforced seams. Its anatomical construction allows the electrician to
wear a safety helmet under the hood of the conductive suit without limiting
mobility and maintaining the Faraday Cage effect around his/her head.
Available in three sizes: Medium, Large, and Extra Large.
Routine test reports are provided along with the conductive suit. These test
data are a parameter of utmost importance for continuous monitoring of
conductive suit quality and performance, even after years of use and
washing.
The conductive suit meets the requirements of IEC 60895.
BARE-HAND EQUIPMENT 197 TEREX

CONDUCTIVE SUITS
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description Size
Reference
kg lb
Full; consisting of pants, jacket,

RC402-0533/C Medium 1.55 3.42
socks, gloves, and a storage bag

RC402-0534/C Large 1.65 3.64

RC402-0535/C Extra Big 1.75 3.86

RC402-0533 Medium 1.38 30.04
Conductive pants and jacket, with

RC402-0534 Large 1.48 3.26
storage bag
Conductive pants and jacket, with

RC402-0535 Extra Big 1.58 3.48
storage bag
RC402-0558 Conductive gloves Single 0.12 0.26
H RC402-0578 Conductive socks Single 0.05 0.11
CONDUCTIVE BOOT
Measures
Catalog
References
Brazil USA Europe
RC417-0623 37 6 39
RC417-0624 38 7 40
RC417-0624/5 39 7.5 41
RC417-0122/5 40 8.5 42
RC417-0123/5 41 9.5 43
RC417-0124 42 10 44
RC417-0125 43 11 45
RC417-0126 44 12 46
RC417-0126/5 45 12.5 47
RC417-0625/5 46 13.5 48
TEREX 198 BARE-HAND EQUIPMENT

BARE-HAND WORKING CHAIR
Designed for safe, quick, and comfortable transport of the electrician from
the ground to the maintenance areas in the structure or close to the power
supply.
Its lightweight, sturdy anatomical construction design with RITZGLAS®
poles and aluminum fittings allows vertical and horizontal travel operations
with absolute precision in approaching the power supply.
It has a device for continuous rotation from the point of connection with the
boom, to better position the electrician when transitioning from the chair to
the conductor. This device comes with the chair and is optional.
The chair is detachable and has a bag for easy transport, packaging, and
storage.
BARE-HAND WORKING CHAIR

Approx.
Maximum Workload Capacity
Catalog Weight.
Reference
daN lb kg lb
FLV12563-1 120 265 19.80 43.65

INSPECTION TROLLEY
Essential tool for inspection and maintenance of transmission lines.
Through the bare-hand method, the electrician has safe and ergonomical
access to the conductors. Its advancing and retreating movements are
controlled by a rope from the tower or the ground.
Mostly made of aluminum this equipment is designed for easy handling
during transport, installation, and use.
INSPECTION TROLLEY
Work
Approx.
Capacity
Catalog Weight
Description Rated
Reference
daN lb kg lb
FLV21045-1
FLV21045-1 for 4 conductors 38.00 83.75

120 265
FLV21549-1 for 3 conductors 55.50 122.36
ACESSORIES
H Catalog
Reference
01 220 m RM1895-3 Polypropylene rope
02 06 pc FLV04803-3 Rope insulating stick
FLV21549-1

BARE-HAND STICK
It is designed to connect the tap wire of the conductive suit with the
energized conductor, in order to establish potential equalization, avoiding
discomforts to the electrician during the work.
It is through the bare-hand stick that the first contact of the electrician with
the energized conductor is made. Similarly, at the end of the work, it must
be disconnected last, thus avoiding electric arcs in the electrician.
Upon returning to ground potential, the stick must first touch the structure
to discharge static energy.
The FLV02544-1 is made of a Ø 32 mm RITZGLAS® tube and has a rest
strap for the stick and a tap wire for the conductive suit.
CONNECTION TYPE
Detachable clamp,: it is also mounted by twisting the stick, but the
electrician can remove the stick, leaving only the mounted clamp. (This
clamp has a quick coupling head to hold the clamp eye bolt firmly and
securely).
BARE-HAND STICK
Minimum Approx.
Insulating
Catalog
Reference
Description Length
Maximum
Opening
Weight
H
(mm)
(mm) kg lb
FLV02544-1 Detachable clamp 340 12 /48 1.60 5.53

H

GROUP I
TOOL REPAIR AND

TRAILER
Repair Sets and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tool Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

GROUP I
TOOL REPAIR AND

TRAILER
REPAIR SETS AND LUBRICANTS
Before purchasing these restorers and lubricants, we recommend that you
obtain from our sales department basic information on their applications
and export policy for chemical products.
I
These products can be easily applied by the user.
- RT400-0803
The gloss restorer is a colorless resin specially prepared for surface
restorations in RITZGLAS® poles when they present surface wear and
loss of gloss.
These types of damage on insulated poles compromise their dielectric
strength, caused by moisture and impurity contamination.
RT400-0803
- RM1909
Tool lubricant made of non-toxic and non-corrosive materials. It has high
lubricating power, preventing oxidation through a durable film, avoiding
friction and wear of metal tools.
TOOL REPAIR AND TRAILER 205 TEREX RITZ

- RH1917
Bond patching set is an orange resin and hardener set recommended only
for recovering from minor cracks or other surface damage such as tears or
splits caused by accidental or improper use of the equipment, and to
reposition metal heads in poles.
RM1917 - RM1904
Silicone-soaked hot stick wiping cloth for surface treatment. It is soaked
with silicone and designed for surface applications on the pole for
preventive protection, leaving a protective layer in its surface.
REPAIR SETS AND LUBRICANTS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
RM1904 kg lb
Gloss restorer, supplied with ten 115 ml bottles, being five

RT400-0803 units of component A and five of component B, packed in a 2.60 5.37
plastic case
RM1909 Tool lubricant, preventing oxidation through a durable film 2.10 4.63
Bond patching set, supplied in two 125 ml bottles,

RH1917 0.32 0.71
components A and B
Silicone-soaked hot stick wiping Cloth for surface treatment

RM1904 0.08 0.18
of insulating hot sticks, 01 cloth measuring 500 x 500 mm
TEREX RITZ 206 TOOL REPAIR AND TRAILER

TOOL TRAILER Manufactur
accordanc
ed in
e with
Ordinance
and
Resolution
of
DENATRAN
/CONTRAN
applicable
Chap. Max. Approx.

Catalog Load Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb kg lb
Hot line tool storage and transport
FLV03102-1 1500 3306 1420 3130
trailer
1745
4430 282 590 590 282
505 505 Tool storage rack
565
415
600
2368
4385 1200
I
Note: Adapt the trailer to a vehicle with a towing capacity of at least 3 ton Jockey wheel
- Chassis structure in steel profiles;
- Wheel set: 16'' rim (215 x 80 x16 tires);
- Suspension type;
Leaf spring assembly and telescopic shock absorbers; Electric whip
- Tandem axle suspension and lubricated balance system;
- Rear cover lifting system;
Pantograph type, crank screw drive;
- 4 ton overrun brake assembly;
- Jockey wheel suspension for 120 kg (265 lb);
- Supplied with wheel wrench and spare wheel;
- Ball-and-shell trailer coupling;
Power plug
- Electrical supply between tow truck and trailer; electric harness with
a 7-pole 12V outlet;
- Internal heating system;
Bi-volt cooler with selector switch (110 or 220 Volts);
Cooler is powered by a harness (when parked)
Rubber lined ladder holders mounted on the rear cover.
Climatizer
TOOL REPAIR AND TRAILER 207 TEREX RITZ

I
TEREX RITZ 208 TOOL REPAIR AND TRAILER

GROUP J
DAYLIGHT WARNING
SPHERES
Conventional Installation Esphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Rope Installation Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Helicopter Installation Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

GROUP J
DAYLIGHT WARNING
SPHERES
They are designed for visual signalling in the air navigation of helicopters,
airplanes, balloons, gliders, etc., preventing their collision with electric
power transmission systems.
Due to the many situations and places where installing daytime warning
spheres is necessary, specific installation models have been developed to
minimize inconveniences caused by hard-to-reach places, rugged terrains
andhighway crossings, among others.
NBR 7276 specifies the situations and locations where warning spheres
J
are mandatory.
In compliance with electric utility requirements, warning spheres are built in
accordance with the NBR 15237 standard and an exclusive manufacturing
process, ensuring excellent properties such as:
- durability;
- ultraviolet resistance;
- wind vibration resistance;
- rotation resistance;
- slip resistance;
- rainwater drainage system through radial holes, perpendicular to the
cable.
DAYLIGHT WARNING SPHERES 211 TEREX RITZ

CONVENTIONAL INSTALLATION ESPHERE
These spheres are installed and removed manually, on the ground, during
line construction or de-energized maintenance.
The conventional system consists of special aluminum alloy bearings,
exclusive rubber pads for every cable diameter, as well as bolts, nuts, and
washers.
CONVENTIONAL INSTALLATION SPHERE

Approx. Weight
Catalog Connection
Reference (mm)
kg lb
ESR19898-1 6 to 8
ESR19898-2 8.1 to 9.5
ESR19898-3 9.51 to 10.5
ESR19898-4 10.51 to 11.5
ESR19898-5 11.51 to 12.5
ESR19898-6 12.51 to 13.5
ESR19898-7 13.51 to 14.5
ESR19898-8 14.51 to 15.5
ESR19898-9 15.51 to 16.5

5.60 12.36
ESR19898-10 16.51 to 17.5
ESR19898-11 17.51 to 18.5

J
ESR19898-12 18.51 to 19.5
ESR19898-13 19.51 to 20.5
ESR19898-14 20.51 to 21.5
ESR19898-15 21.51 to 22.5
ESR19898-16 22.51 to 23.5
ESR19898-17 23.51 to 24.5
ESR19898-18 24.51 to 25.5
TEREX RITZ 212 DAYLIGHT WARNING SPHERES

ROPE INSTALLATION SPHERE
Designed for convenience and productivity, it allows hot line installation
and removal operations in steel, aluminum, or OPGW cables, from the
ground, using:
- Remote control robot specially designed for this task or
- Rope operation kit.
ROPE OR ROBOT INSTALLATION SPHERE

Approx. Weight
Catalog Connection
Reference (mm)
kg lb
ESR19899-1 6 to 8
ESR19899-2 8.1 to 10
ESR19899-3 10.1 to 12
ESR19899-4 12.1 to 14
6.06 13.36
ESR19899-5 14.1 to 16
ESR19899-6 16.1 to 18
ESR19899-7 18.1 to 20
ESR19899-8 20.1 to 22
ESR12981-1 - ROPE INSTALLATION KIT
Item Quant. Unit.

Catalog
Description
J
Reference FLV03278-3
01 1 pc FLV03278-3 Aluminum snatch block
02 1 pc ESR12963-1 Snatch block stick

ESR12963-1
03 6 pc ESR11795-1 Rope insulated stick (Ø 6 x 1500 mm)
04 1 pc ESR12591-1 Hooks
ESR11795-1
05 220 m RM1895-1 Synthetic fiber rope
ESR12591-1
DAYLIGHT WARNING SPHERES 213 TEREX RITZ

HELICOPTER INSTALLATION SPHERE
These spheres have a special cable opening and coupling mechanism,
which is driven by a single eye bolt located at its top, which can be
operated with a sphere installation hot stick. It is also provided with a
counterweight to keep the eye bolt at the top of the sphere.
Hot line installation and removal is quickly and safely performed directly
from a helicopter.
HELICOPTER INSTALLATION SPHERE

Approx. Weight
Catalog Connection
Reference (mm)
kg lb
ESR19900-1 6 to 8
ESR19900-2 8.1 to 10
ESR19900-3 10.1 to 12
ESR19900-4 12.1 to 14
5.57 12.28
ESR19900-5 14.1 to 16
ESR19900-6 16.1 to 18
ESR19900-7 18.1 to 20
ESR19900-8 20.1 to 22
TEREX RITZ 214 DAYLIGHT WARNING SPHERES

GROUP L
GROUNDING EQUIPMENT,
TELESCOPIC AND
SECTIONAL HOT STICKS
Temporary Grounding Set . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Grounding Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Low Voltage Grounding Sets . . . . . . . . . . 220 Saddle-Type Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Medium Voltage Grounding Sets . . . . . . . 223 Auxiliary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
High Voltage Grounding Sets . . . . . . . . . 235 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Lifting and Installation Tool for

Telescopic Hot Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Substation Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Static Grounding Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Height Measuring Hot Stick . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Grounding Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Sectional Hot Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Copper Cables for Grounding . . . . . . . . . 254 Operational Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Ground Cable Ferrule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Hot Line Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

GROUP L
TELESCOPIC AND
TEMPORARY GROUNDING SET
An effective electrical connection equipment with intentional low
impedance grounding, designed to ensure and maintain equipotential
bonding during interventions in the electrical installation, protecting
workers from accidental energization.
A proper specification of the temporary grounding set (ATR) is the first
principle to ensure efficiency and safety in performing de-energized line
work if the system is accidentally energized. Such specification must
match the characteristics of the electrical installation where the Temporary
Grounding Set will be installed.
Carefully read the following basic requirements for the correct
specification of the Temporary Grounding Set to ensure electrician safety.
For the specification of the ATR, the following characteristics of the
L
electrical installations must be known before using it:
a. Installation type and voltage level:
Overhead network or line (kV);
Substation (kV);
Secondary Network (LV) with bare or shielded cable;
Underground network (kV);
b. Maximum short-circuit current;
c. Protection system actuation time;
TELESCOPIC AND SECTIONAL HOT STICKS 217 TEREX RITZ
d. Structure Type:
Metal:
Concrete;
Wood;
e. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground distances;
f. Phase and ground conductor sections where the ATR will be installed.
Maintenance on powered off overhead networks is, at first glance, an
apparently safe condition to carry out the work. However, they may be
mistakenly energized by several common factors:
- Operational errors;
- Accidental contact with other live circuits;
- Voltages induced by adjacent lines;
- Lightning discharges, even if distant from the workplace;
- Third-party power sources
Unfortunately, the factors described here are not theoretical facts, or even
impossible to occur, as maintenance workers tend to imagine. This is
because practice has shown us the truth through numberless accidents
that occur every year at electric companies.
Temporary grounding and shorting are the main protection of people
working on de-energized lines so they must be seen as their main work
tool.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE OF THE TEMPORARY

GROUNDING SET
1. Check that the line is de-energized using the Voltage Detector mounted
to the RITZGLAS® hot stick.
2. Insert the Ground Screw Rod into the ground and connect the clamp
(ground) to its rod. The screw rod must be inserted as deep as
possible, leaving above the ground just enough space to connect the
clamp.
3. Using the RITZGLAS® Hot Stick and proceeding as in hot line work,
the phase clamps must be slowly lifted and connected to the central
phase.
4. Using the RITZGLAS® Hot Stick, the second and third clamps must be
L connected to the side phases, which concludes the phase-to-ground
interconnection.
5. Only after installing the grounding set, must the electrician have access
to the conductors. This is to say that a line can only be deemed de-
energized after being properly grounded
TEREX RITZ 218 TELESCOPIC AND SECTIONAL HOT STICKS
NOTES
1. The short-circuit current rating of the set is limited to the specified
grounding and shorting cable cross-section.
The cable specification may have its cross-section (mm²) and/or length
changed, both to increase or to decrease it, according to the short-
circuit power of the electrical system where the set will be used.
2. Additionally, RITZGLAS® hot sticks can be supplied with other lengths
according to operational needs. (See specific page for this product).
3. The bag has reinforced edges, with internal dividers for the proper
storage of hot stick sections, a carrying handle, and an additional
pocket for a tool head.
This bag must be ordered separately, as it is optional.
Color patterns desired by the client may be supplied provided it is
previously agreed upon when requesting the quote.
LOW VOLTAGE GROUNDING SETS
Temporary Grounding Rod for Secondary Networks
(LV)
- ATR04514-1 / ATR04514-2
The temporary grounding rod for secondary networks is used for
maintenance services in de-energized low voltage overhead lines.
The electrician can use it to connect phase conductors to the neutral
conductor simultaneously, shorting them with a single move.
This rod is constructed with a RITZGLAS® Ø 25 mm tube, aluminum
jaws, and rubber storm skirt, delimiting the grip area.
The clamping jaws are connected to the conductor through compression
springs, providing faster installation without damaging the conductors.
The aluminum bar used to interconnect the jaws has a screw at its lower
end to connect a ground cable
Catalog Reference ATR04514-1 ATR04514-2
Overall length (m) 1.40 1.20
Number of Jaws 5 4
Minimum Connection Capacity (mm) Ø 3.50 Ø 3.50
Maximum Connection Capacity

Ø 19.50 Ø 19.50
(mm)
ATR04514-2
Approximate weight (kg / lb) 1.40 / 3.09 1.10 / 2.43
L ATR04514-1
Temporary Grounding Set for Conventional
Secondary Networks (LV)
- ATR17439-1 | ATR17439-2
Maximum short-circuit current: - 60 cycles:5 kA
Item 01
ATR17439-1
Catalog
Item Qty. Unit. Description
Reference
Spring-loaded grounding clamp mounted to Ø 25 mm x 300 mm RITZGLAS® pole with rubber

01 04 pc ATR17348-1
handle
Extra-flexible copper cable, 25 mm² cross-section, with transparent PVC insulation, being three
02 1.20 m CTC-25
400 mm length
03 06 pc ATR26446-2 25 mm² tin-plated copper cable lug
04 06 pc ATR17923-4 Heat shrink

L
05 01 pc ATR16843-7 Bag for storage and transport of the grounding set
ATR17439-2
Catalog
Reference
Spring-loaded grounding clamp mounted to Ø 25 mm x 300 mm RITZGLAS® pole with rubber

01 05 pc ATR17348-1
handle
02 1.60 m CTC-25
400 mm length
Secondary Networks (LV) Insulated with Multiplex
and Conventional Cable with Bare Cable
- ATR13043-1
Maximum short-circuit current: - 60 cycles: 8 kA
This equipment enables quick, practical and safe installation and innovates
the concept of grounding in LV multiplexedcables insulated systems or
conventional systems.
Provided with pressure grounding clamps made of aluminum alloy and
handles with rubber coating.
Equipped with tail connectors that can be installed on the system at pre-
determined locations, using jumper piercing connectors (refer to note 3
below), enabling the quick connection of the equipment to the system.
In order to increase safety of the installation, these tail connectors are
provided with special terminals to protect the exposed connection points
after the removal of the grounding set.
ATR13043-1
Catalog
Reference
ATR13047-1 Conductor-mounted spring-loaded grounding clamp with red plastic coated grip for phases
01 04 pc
ATR13047-2 (ATR13047-1) and black plastic coated grip for neutral (ATR13047-).
Extra-flexible copper cable, 35 mm² cross-section, with transparent PVC insulation, being
02 1,50 m CTC-35
three 500 mm length
NOTE
L Terex does not manufacture derivation piercing connectors. They must be
purchased from third parties in quantities and sizes compatible with the
conductors of the secondary network.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE GROUNDING SET
Temporary Grounding Set for Distribution Networks
(MV)
- ATR03654-1
Item 01
Item 03
Item 07
ATR03654-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR03653-1 Spring-loaded grounding clamp. Spring-loaded quick contact
02 01 pc ATR04694-1 Cluster bar for clamp installation and removal operations
03 01 pc ATR03641-1 Mounting reel, with bronze clamp, for connection to ground rod and storage of ground cable
L
Extra-flexible copper cable, 25 mm² cross-section, with transparent PVC insulation,
04 16 m CTC-25
being two 2 m length and one 12 m length
07 01 pc ATR00137-2 Ø 17 mm x 1 m ground rod
08 01 pc VMR00884-1 Switching tool head
10 01 pc VMR-45/L RITZGLAS® Lightweight sectional hot stick
11 01 pc VMR10484-2 Bag with inner dividers for storage of hot stick and ground rod
(MV)
- ATR30260-1
Item 01
Item 03
Item 09
ATR30260-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR13628-1 Snap-on spring-loaded grounding clamp
02 01 pc ATR14442-1 Cluster bar for clamp installation and removal operations
L 04 4 m CTC-35
being two cable 2 m length
Extra-flexible copper cable, 25 mm², cross-section, with transparent PVC insulation,

05 15 m CTC-25
being one cable 15 m length
08 06 pc ATR17923 Heat shrink
10 01 pc ATR16819-1 Bag for storage and transport of ground rod
(MV)
- ATR09734-1
Item 01
Item 02
Item 03
Item 07
ATR09734-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc RG3403 Twisting grounding clamp with eyescrew
02 01 pc ATR04116-1 Cluster bar for simultaneous lifting of phase clamps
03 01 pc RG3403T Grounding clamp, with T-handle for connection to the ground point L
04 16 m CTC-25
being two 2 m length and one 12 m length
05 06 pc ATR13036-2 25 mm² plain shrouded aluminum ferrule
07 01 pc ATR00137-2 Ø 17 mm x 1.0 m ground rod
08 01 pc VMR07205-1 Tool head for grounding clamp
11 01 cj VMR-45 RITZGLAS® sectional hot stick
12 01 pc ATR10484-2 Bag with inner dividers for storage of hot stick and ground rod
(MV)
- ATR09729-1
Item 01
Item 02
Item 03
Item 04
Item 10
ATR09729-1
Catalog
Reference
L 03 01 pc ATR03318-1 Pole-mounted cluster bar, with wheel, for grounding intermediary point
04 03 pc RG3403T Grounding clamp with T-handle for connection to the ground point

05 17 m CTC-35
being two 2 m length, one 3 m length, and one 10 m length.
06 08 pc RC600-2626 35 mm² plain shrouded aluminum ferrule
Temporary Grounding Set with Telescopic Hot Stick
for Distribution Networks (MT)
- ATR04631-1
Item 01
Item 02
Item 03
Item 09
ATR04631-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR17460-1 Twisting grounding clamp mounted to telescopic hot stick extended length: 1.80 m

04 04 m CTC-35
being two 2 m length

06 10 m CTC-25
being one 10 m length
TELESCOPIC AND SECTIONAL HOT STICKS
Temporary Grounding Set with Telescopic Hot Stick
for Distribution Networks (MT)
- ATR17457-1
Item 01
Item 02
Item 04
Item 03
Item 09 Item 05
ATR17457-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR17462-1 Twisting grounding clamp mounted to telescopic hot stick and extended length: 2.59 m

L Twisting grounding clamp, with eyescrew, one for phase/neutral cable and one for neutral
03 02 pc RG3403
cable/saddle
04 01 pc ATR03318-1 Pole-mounted cluster bar, with wheel, for grounding intermediary point

06 18 m CTC-35
being four 2 m length and one 10 m length
Temporary Grounding Set for Distribuition
Overhead Lines (MT)
- RT600-0641
Item 01
Item 03
Item 07
RT600-0641
Catalog
Reference
01 10 pc RC600-0065 Twisting grounding clamp with eyescrew and serrated jaw
02 03 pc RC600-0080 Clamp resting support

04 18,2 m CTC-35
being three 1.8 m length, one 3.6 m length, and one 9.2 m length
05 10 pc RC600-2618 35 mm² threaded shrouded aluminum ferrule L

Temporary Grounding Set for Distribuition
Overhead Lines (MT)
- ATR17456-1
This temporary grounding model is very versatile as it can be installed in
different network configurations, such as: three-phase vertical and
horizontal distribution and single-phase network.
Item 01
Item 01
Item 03
Item 03
Item 08
ATR17456-1
Catalog
Reference
L 02 03 pc RG3626 Clamp resting support

04 18 m CTC-35
being four 2 m length and one 10 m length
Temporary Grounding Set for Switchgear and
Substations (MV)
- ATR17572-1
Item 01
Item 03
ATR17572-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR08947-1 Twisting grounding clamp mounted to insulated pole with handle

02 09 m CTC-25
being three 2.5 m length and one 1.5 m length
03 01 pc ATR17574-1 Thermoplastic terminal block
04 01 pc RG3363-1 Grounding clamp with T-handle for connection to the ground point
05 07 pc ATR17423-2 25 mm² tin-plated copper cable lug.
L 08 01 pc ATR29262-1 Bag for storage and transport of the grounding set L
Substations (MV)
- ATR12407-1
Item 01
Item 02
Item 03
ATR12407-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc ATR11627-1 Twisting grounding clamp with eyescrew for buses
02 01 pc RG4754-1 Terminal block with 04 ground cable connectors
03 01 pc ATR11627-2 Grounding clamp with T-handle for connection to the ground point

04 06 m CTC-50
being three 2 m length

06 01 m CTC-25
L
10 01 pc VMR02579-1 Clamp tool head
RITZGLAS® telescopic hot stick, 5 triangular sections. Extended length: 1.80 m;

11 01 pc VTT-5/1800
Retracted length: 0.60 m
Substations (MV)
- ATR12407-1
For the specification of ball studs, indispensable to install this temporary
grounding set, refer to the specific page of this product, considering the
most applicable format and dimensions.
Item 01
Item 02
Item 03
ATR17455-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc RC600-2316 Twisting grounding clamp with eyescrew for ball stud or conductor mounting
02 01 pc RG4754-1 Terminal block with 04 ground cable connectors
03 01 pc RC600-2231 Grounding clamp with T-handle for connection to the ground point

04 4,5 m CTC-70
being three 1.5 m length
05 03 pc RC600-2604 Plain threaded aluminum ferrule for 70 mm² cable
07 2,5 m CTC-35
Extra-flexible copper cable, 35 mm² cross-section, with transparent PVC insulation, L
being one 2.5 m length
08 01 pc RC600-2602 Plain threaded aluminum ferrule for 35 mm² cable
Temporary Grounding Equipment for Vehicles (MV)
- ATR17440-1
This grounding equipment model provides the discharge of the
capacitance or static loads of vehicles with aerial devices or service
vehicles.
For safety purposes, the use of this model is limited exclusively to the
grounding of vehicles, therefore it cannot be used for different purposes.
Item 02
Item 01 Item 07
ATR17440-1
Catalog
Reference

03 10 m CTC-25
L 04 01 pc ATR17184-2 25 mm² threaded shrouded aluminum ferrule
HIGH VOLTAGE GROUNDING SETS
Temporary Grounding Set for Transmission Lines
(HV) - Wood, concrete, and metal structure
- ATR17441-1
Item 01
Item 03
Item 08
ATR17441-1
Catalog
Reference
01 12 pc RC600-0965 Twisting grounding clamp, with eyescrew and serrated jaw
02 04 pc RG3626 Clamp resting support

L

04 27 m CTC-95
being three 4 m length, two 3 m length, and one 9 m length
Temporary Grounding Set for Transmission Lines
(HV) - Metal structure
- ATR17442-1
Item 01
Item 02
ATR17442-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc RC600-1732 All angle Twisting grounding clamp with eyescrew

03 24 m CTC-95
being three 8 m length
04 03 pc RC600-2621 95 mm² threaded shrouded aluminum ferrule
Temporary Grounding Set for Substation (HV)
- ATR17454-1
Item 01
Item 02
ATR17454-1
Catalog
Reference
01 03 pc RC600-1732 All angle grounding clamp with bus eyescrew
02 03 pc RC600-2231 T-handle grounding clamp for connection to ground point (cable or angle bar)
03 30 m CTC-95
10 m length
04 06 pc RC600-2621 95 mm² threaded shrouded aluminum ferrule

L
LIFTING AND INSTALLATION TOOL FOR
SUBSTATION GROUNDING
This tool kit allows the lifting and installation of temporary grounding sets
on buses in extra-high voltage substation, directly from the ground, at a
height of up to 8 m.
Tip sections (ATR01875-1 and VMR/S-SP) must be coupled to separate
hot sticks with lengths compatible with the substation bus height.
Section ATR01875-1 must be installed on the bus through the support
hook. The VMR/S-SP section will lift the clamp and ground cable
ATR23989-1
Approx.
Working
Catalog Weight
Item Qty. Unit. Description Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
01 01 pc ATR01875-1 Hot stick and tip section with support hook and snatch block 1.25 3.50 7.72
02 01 pc VMR/S-SP Hot stick, tip section with universal head and hinged clamp 1.25 1.50 2.76
03 20 m RM1895-2 Ø 3/8” Polypropylene Rope - 0.05 0.11
ATR01875-1
VMR/S-SP
L ACESSORIES
Approx.
Working
Catalog Weight
Item Qty. Unit. Description Length
Reference
(m)
kg lb
04 * pc VMR-I Hot stick middle section 1.25 1.20 2.65
05 01 pc VMR-P Hot stick handle section 1.45 1.10 2.43
06 01 pc ** Bag for hot stick storage - - -
* Quantity defined according to bus height

** Bag defined according to the amount of sections of the Maneuver Stick
STATIC GROUNDING SET
This static grounding set is designed to reliably remove static loads on de-
energized systems such as: connection terminals and conductors on
transformers or generators.
To operate this tool, first connect the grounding clamp to a safe ground
point.
Then, using the copper hook, install the stick at the point where the static
charge must be discharged from the system.
When maintenance is complete, use the same sequential procedure
adopted in the installation, but in the opposite order. That is: first remove
the ground stick from the work point and then disconnect the grounding
clamp.
STATIC GROUNDING SET

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
Ø 32 mm x 1,07 m RITZGLAS® stick composed of:

1 twisting duckbill clamp with T-handle (RG3363-4SJ)
RT600-0891 2.60 5.73
and 2.10 m of extra-flexible copper cable 25 mm² cross-
section, with transparent PVC insulation
GROUNDING CLAMP
Ball Studs and Ball-and-Socket Clamps for
Temporary Grounding
The ball stud and ball-and-socket clamp are designed to solve countless
temporary grounding situations where space or contact surfaces are
limited.
In switchgears, especially with rectangular buses, where conventional
ground clamps have dimensions that preven their use, the ball-and socket
clamp stands out for its versatile design and easy operation.
This clamp is very popular in electrical installations such as:
- switchgears;
- indoor and outdoor substations;
- overhead cranes;
- hot line vehicles;
- painted transmission line structures where optimum electrical contact
with conventional clamps is not obtained.
Ball studs are designed for permanent installations in buses, bus junctions,
terminals or other parts of the electrical installation, establishing the points
necessary for their proper temporary grounding. Therefore, purchasing
them in sufficient quantities for such use is recommended.
To best suit the user needs, they are arranged with seven variations in
connecting ball length and position.
Bronze alloy body and tin-plated 1020 steel thread and 3.5 daN.m
installation torque.
BALL STUDS (STRAIGHT)
A
Approx.
Catalog Weight
C B A B C
Reference
kg lb
Ø 26
M12
ATR08969-3 138 58 80 0.25 0.55

L
A
BALL STUD (L-TYPE)
B Approx.
Catalog Weight
A B C
Reference
M12
kg lb
ATR13147-1 91 50 65 0.26 0.57

C
Ø 26
Ball-and-Shell Ground Clamps
Catalog Reference
Electrical and Mechanical
Characteristics
RC600-2300 RT600-2321
Bronze alloy main body; Bronze alloy main body;

Description Eyescrew; T-handle;
Cable connection through plain ferrule Cable connection through plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 400
30 cycles
30 30
Short circuit (kA)
current
(lcc) 60 cycles
23 23
(kA)
Connection Ø 26 Ø 26
Maximum 95 95
Cable Ferrule
(mm²)
Minimum 25 25
Installation Torque (daN.m) 3.0 3.0
Type I Type III

ASTM Designation Class A Class A
Grade 5 Grade 5
Approx. Weight. (kg / lb) 0.76 / 1.68 0.82 / 1.81
Multi-Connection Grounding Clamp
The RC600-2316 grounding clamp can be installed on circular
conductors, rectangular bars and ball studs. Its two threaded housings can
be used to install ball studs in its body for the simultaneous lifting of two
additional clamps for a three-phase grounding system.
MULTI-CONNECTION GROUNDING CLAMP

Catalog Reference
Electrical and
Mechanical Characteristics
RC600-2316
Aluminum main body;

Description Eyescrew;
Cable connection through plain threaded ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400
30 cycles
30
Short circuit (kA)
current
(lcc) 60 cycles
23
(kA)
636 MCM CAA

Maximum
Ø 25 mm
Connection
8 Cu
Minimum
Ø 26 mm
Maximum 95
Cable Ferrule
(mm²)
Minimum 16
Installation Torque (daN.m) 3.0
Type I
ASTM Designation Class A
Grade 5
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 0.68 / 1.50
Temporary Ground Clamps for Low
and Medium Voltage Networks
Electrical and Catalog Reference

Mechanical
Characteristics RG3403 RG3403T ATR11627-1 ATR17459-1
Aluminium body;
Aluminum body; Aluminium body; Aluminium body;
Smooth jaw;
Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw;
Description Mounted to insulating tube
Eyescrew; T-handle; Eyescrew;
Ø 25 mm x 1,25 m;
Cable connection through Cable connection through Cable connection through
Cable connection through
plain ferrule plain ferrule plain ferrule
plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 300 300 - 300
30 cycles
Short- 20 20 30 20
(kA)
Circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 15 15 23 15
(kA)
Buses
477 MCM CAA 477 MCM CAA vertical 40 mm 477 MCM CAA
Maximum
Ø 22.5 mm Ø 22.5 mm horizontal 44 mm Ø 22.5 mm
circular 35 mm
Connection
6 AWG Cu 6 AWG Cu Buses 6 AWG Cu
Minimum 4 AWG CA 4 AWG CA vertical 6 mm 4 AWG CA
Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm circular 6 mm Ø 4 mm
Cable Maximum 70 70 95 70
Ferrule L
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3,0 3,0
(daN.m)
Type I Type III Type I Type II

ASTM Designation Class A Class A Class A Class A
Grade 3 Grade 3 Grade 5 Grade 3
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 0.48 / 1.06 0.51 / 1.12 0.65 / 1,43 1.10 / 2.43

Mechanical
Characteristics ATR19433-1 ATR17461-1 ATR17460-1 ATR17462-1
Clamp mainly designed for

switchgear grounding with Aluminum body; Aluminium body;
vertical rectangular buses. Aluminum body;
Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw;
Aluminum body; Smooth jaw;
Mounted to telescopic hot Fixed to telescopic hot stick -
Smooth jaw; Mounted to hot stick tip
Description stick, Ø 33 mm base, Ø 33 mm base, retracted
section Ø 25 mm x 1.25 m,
Mounted to insulated pipe retracted length 1 m and length 1.43 m and extended
with coupling system;
Ø 25 mm x 600 mm, with extended length 1.80 m; length 2.58 m;
rubber handle; Cable connection through
Cable connection through Cable connection through
plain ferrule
Cable connection through plain ferrule plain ferrule.
plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 300 300 300
30 cycles
Short- 30 20 20 20
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 15 15 15
(kA)
20 mm 477 MCM CAA 477 MCM CAA 477 MCM CAA

Maximum
(rectangular buses) Ø 22.5 mm Ø 22.5 mm Ø 22.5 mm
L Connection
6 AWG Cu 6 AWG Cu 6 AWG Cu
3 mm
Minimum 4 AWG CA 4 AWG CA 4 AWG CA
(rectangular buses)
Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm
Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type II Type II Type II Type II

ASTM Designation Class A Class A Class A Class A
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 0.72 / 1.59 1.10 / 2.43 1.40 / 3.09 1.40 / 3.09

Mechanical
Characteristics ATR08947-1 ATR09033-1 ATR17348-1
Aluminum body; Smooth jaw;

Bronze body;
Bronze body;
Mounted to Ø 25 mm x 300 mm
Mounted to insulated pole
Mounted to insulated pole insulating tube, with rubber handle;
Description Ø 1/2” x 640 mm, with rubber handle;
Ø 1/2” x 640 mm, with rubber handle; spring-loaded mounting to conductor;
Cable connection through tin-plated
Cable connection through plain ferrule Cable connection through tin-plated
copper ferrule (not included in clamp)
copper ferrule (not included in clamp)
Rated Current (A) 200 200 -
30 cycles
Short- 8 8 10
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 5 5 7
(kA)
336,4 MCM CAA

Maximum Ø 30 mm Ø 19 mm
Ø 19 mm
Connection
6 AWG Cu
Minimum Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm 4 AWG CA
Ø 4 mm
L
Cable Maximum 25 25 35
Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16
Installation Torque
2.0 2.0 -
(daN.m)
ASTM Designation - - -
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 0.75 / 1.65 0.65 / 1.43 0.36 / 0.79

Mechanical
Characteristics ATR03653-1 ATR13628-1 ATR13047-1 ATR13047-2
Aluminium body; Aluminium body;
Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw;

Spring-loaded mounting Aluminium body; Aluminium body;
Conductor-mounted to
connection blade spring-
conductor; connection to Spring-loaded tap cable Spring-loaded tap cable
Description loaded; cluster bar
cluster bar (ATR04694-1) installation; installation;
(ATR14442-1) self-locking
galvanized steel.
system; Red plastic handle Black plastic handle
Cable connection through Cable connection through tin-
copper ferrule (not included plated copper ferrule (not
in clamp) included in clamp)
Rated Current (A) - - - -
30 cycles
Short- 10 15 10 10
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 7 8 7 7
(kA)
336,4 MCM CAA

Maximum Ø 30 mm Ø 12,5 mm Ø 12,5 mm
Ø 19 mm
Connection
6 AWG Cu
Minimum 4 AWG CA Ø 5 mm Ø 6,5 mm Ø 6,5 mm
Ø 4 mm
L
Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
- - - -
(daN.m)
Type III Type III

ASTM Designation - - Class B Class B
Grade 5 Grade 5
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 0.35 / 0,77 0.45 / 0.99 0.35 / 0.77 0.35 / 0.77
Temporary Ground Clamps for Substations

Mechanical
Characteristics Rg3368 RG3367-2 RG3369 RC600-0337* ATR03308-2*
Aluminium body; Adjustable aluminum Adjustable aluminum Adjustable aluminum

Aluminium body;
body and shoe; body and shoe; body and shoe;
Removable and
Smooth jaw;
smooth jaw; Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw;
Description Eyescrew;
Eyescrew; Eyescrew; Eyescrew; Eyescrew;
Cable connection
Cable connection Cable connection Cable connection Cable connection
through plain ferrule
through plain ferrule through plain ferrule through plain ferrule through plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23 23 23
(kA)
Ø 50 mm or 12 x 100
Maximum Ø 63,5 mm Ø 100 mm Ø 160 mm Ø 235 mm
mm rectangular buses
Connection
Minimum Ø 5 mm Ø 6 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 90 mm Ø 115 mm
L
Cable Maximum 95 95 95 95 95
Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type I Type I Type I Type I Type I

ASTM Designation Class A Class A Class A Class A Class A
Grade 5 Grade 5 Grade 5 Grade 5 Grade 5
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 1.00 / 2,20 1.20 / 2.65 2.20 / 4.85 3.20 / 7.05 3.20 / 7.05
*It allows the use of two 95 mm² cables simultaneously
Temporary Ground Clamps for High Voltage Lines

Mechanical
Characteristics RC600-1743 RG3622-1 RC600-0434 RC600-0065
Aluminium body; Aluminium body; Aluminium body; Aluminium body;

Smooth jaw; Smooth jaw; Serrated jaw; Serrated jaw;
Description Eyescrew; Eyescrew; Eyescrew; Eyescrew;
Cable connection through Cable connection through Cable connection through Cable connection through
plain ferrule plain ferrule plain ferrule plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23 23
(kA)
1000 MCM Cu 566 MCM Cu 950 MCM Cu

954 MCM CAA
Maximum 1590 MCM CAA 900 MCM CAA 1510 MCM CAA
Ø 30 mm
Ø 38 mm Ø 29 mm Ø 38 mm
Connection
6 Cu 6 Cu 6 Cu 6 Cu
Minimum
Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm
L Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type I Type I Type I Type I

ASTM Designation Class A Class A Class B Class B

Mechanical
Characteristics RG4229-1SJ ATR13159-1 RHG4229-6SJ RC600-1732
Aluminium body;
Aluminium body; Aluminium body; Aluminium body;
Serrated Jaw;
Serrated Jaw; Serrated Jaw; Serrated Jaw;
Cable connection Mounted to
Eyescrew; Eyescrew; RITZGLAS® tube Ø 32 mm x Eyescrew;
Description 1.83 m;
plain ferrule; plain ferrule; Cable connection through threaded ferrule;
plain ferrule;
Allows operation at Locking of preset and fixed Allows operation at
continuous angles up to 75° operating angles by wing nut Allows operation at continuous angles up to 75°
continuous angles up to 75°
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23 23
(kA)
954 MCM CAA 954 MCM CAA 954 MCM CAA 954 MCM CAA
Maximum
Ø 30 mm Ø 30 mm Ø 30 mm Ø 73 mm
Connection
2 Cu 2 Cu 2 Cu 2 Cu
Minimum
Ø 6.5 mm Ø 6,5 mm Ø 6,5 mm Ø 6,5 mm
Ferrule
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
L
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type I Type I Type II Type I

ASTM Designation Class B Class B Class B Class B

Mechanical
Characteristics RG4228-10SJ ATR10777-1 RHG4228-16SJ
Aluminum body; Aluminum body; Aluminum body; Serrated jaw;

Serrated jaw; Serrated jaw; Fixed to Ø 32 mm x 1.83 m
Eyescrew; Eyescrew; RITZGLAS® tube;
Description Cable connection through
Cable connection through Cable connection through
plain ferrule. plain ferrule. plain ferrule.
Allow operation at continuous Locking of preset and fixed Allow operation at continuous
angles up to 75 ° operating angles by wing nut angles up to 75 °
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23
(kA)
Maximum Ø 73 mm Ø 73 mm Ø 73 mm
Connection
2 Cu 2 Cu 2 Cu
Minimum
Ø 6.5 mm Ø 6.5 mm Ø 6.5 mm
L Ferrule
Installation Torque
3,0 3,0 3,0
(daN.m)
Type I Type I Type II

ASTM Designation Class B Class B Class B
Grade 5 Grade 5 Grade 5

Mechanical
Characteristics RC600-0965 RC600-2282 RC600-0386 RC600-2275
Aluminium body;
Aluminium body; Aluminium body; Aluminium body;
Serrated Jaw;
Serrated Jaw; Serrated Jaw; Smooth jaw;
Description Fixed to Ø 32 mm x 1.83 m
Eyescrew; Eyescrew; Eyescrew;
RITZGLAS® tube;
plain ferrule. plain ferrule. plain ferrule.
plain ferrule.
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23 23
(kA)
954 MCM CAA 1033 MCM CAA

Maximum Ø 51 mm Ø 51 mm
Ø 29.6 mm Ø 31.7 mm
Connection
6 Cu 6 Cu 6 Cu 8 Cu
Minimum
Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm Ø 3.2 mm
Ferrule L
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type I Type I Type II Type I

ASTM Designation Class B Class B Class B Class A
Temporary Ground Clamps for connection
to Ground Point

Mechanical
Characteristics RG3363-4SJ RG3363-1 RC600-0085
Aluminium body;
Aluminium body; Aluminium body; Bronze pad for better contact of jaw
with angle bar surface;
Serrated Jaw; Serrated Jaw;
Aluminum flange (removable) for
Description T-handle; T-handle; mounting to the angle bar;
Cable connection through Cable connection through T-handle;
plain ferrule plain ferrule
plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23
(kA)
38 mm 51 a 102 mm
Maximum Ø 32 mm
(rectangular buse) (rectangular buse)
Connection
3,2 mm
Minimum Ø 5 mm -
(rectangular buse)
L
Ferrule
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type III Type III Type III

ASTM Designation Class B Class B Class B
Grade 5 Grade 5 Grade 5
Temporary Ground Clamps for connection
to Ground Point

Mechanical
Characteristics ATR11627-2 RC600-1617 RC600-2231 RG3622-1T
Aluminium body; Bronze body; Bronze body; Aluminium body;

Serrated Jaw; Mobile serrated jaw; Serrated Jaw; Smooth jaw;
Description T-handle; T-handle; T-handle; T-handle;
Cable connection through Cable connection through Cable connection through Cable connection through
plain ferrule plain ferrule plain plain ferrule plain ferrule
Rated Current (A) 400 400 400 400
30 cycles
Short- 30 30 30 30
(kA)
circuit
Current
60 cycles
(lcc) 23 23 23 23
(kA)
Buses:
566 MCM Cu
vertical 40 mm 25,4 mm 38 mm
Maximum 900 MCM CAA
horizontal 44 mm (rectangular buses) (rectangular buses)
Ø 29 mm
circular 35 mm
Connection
Buses:
3 mm 3 mm 6 Cu
Minimum vertical 6 mm
(rectangular buses) (rectangular buses) Ø 4.0 mm
circular 6 mm
Ferrule L
(mm²) Minimum 16 16 16 16
Installation Torque
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(daN.m)
Type III Type III Type III Type III

ASTM Designation Class B Class B Class B Class A
Cutout Grounding Clamps
Specially designed clamp for temporary grounding of the cutout in medium
voltage networks by installing it on the bottom base of the cutout after
removal of the cartridge.
Cables can be attached directly to this clamp (either to the conventional
grounding clamp or to the “L” or “T” brackets). Another great use for this
RC600-0861 clamp is that it prevents the cutout from being accidentally switched while
it is in the mains.
The body and studs “L” and “T” are made of aluminum alloy with a bronze
alloy eyescrew.
CUTOUT GROUNDING CLAMPS

RC600-0862
Approx.
Catalog Weight
Description
Reference
kg lb
RC600-0861 Cutout grounding clamps with T-stud 0.73 1.61
RC600-0862 Cutout grounding clamps with L-stud 0.67 1.48
COPPER CABLES FOR GROUNDING

Extra flexible electrolytic copper cable with 750 V and translucent PVC
insulated protection, allowing inspections of the perfect condition of the
copper filaments. It is suitable for use on temporary and terminal
grounding.
For easy size identification and classification, the application and year of
manufacture are engraved on the entire length of the cable.
L COPPER CABLES FOR GROUNDING EQUIPMENT

Capacidade
Minimum Insulation
Maximum Electrical
Icc Capacity
Rated Current (A)
Approx.
Resistance 20º C
ØWire Maximum
Thickness (mm)
Wire Formation
de Icc
Cross Section
External (mm)
(ohms / km)
(symmetric kA) Weight

AWG Size
(simétrica kA)
(mm²)
(mm²)
Catalog
(mm)
Ø
Reference
60 cycles
(1 Seg.)
kg/m lb/m
CTC-25 25 - 5.0 150 0.795 19 x 42 0.26 11.52 1.8 0.300 0.661
CTC-35 35 2 (33.63) 8.0 200 0.565 37 x 30 0.31 12.90 2.0 0.400 0.882
CTC-50 50 1/0 (55.48) 10.0 250 0.386 19 x 52 0.31 14.53 2.0 0.545 1.202
CTC-70 70 2/0 (67.42) 15.0 300 0.272 61 x 23 0.31 17.00 2.2 0.765 1.687
CTC-95 95 4/0 (107.20) 25.0 400 0.210 51 x 31 0.31 19.03 2.2 1.000 2.205
GROUND CABLE FERRULE
They are crimped to the ends of the grounding cables to form a good Shrouded Plain Ferrule
electrical and mechanical connection between grounding cables and clamps.
Cable
They are also made of aluminum or copper, with internal diameters according
to the rated cable cross-section. Fastening system options are clamp, Section A Section B
threaded, or plain.
Shrouded Threaded Ferrule
A heat shrink overlaps connection points between the cable and the ferrule,
preventing moisture penetration and minimizing chances cable breaking due Cable
to handling. Section A Section B
Both also have two crimping types:

Unshrouded Plain Ferrule
- Shrouded ferrule
Cable
It has a crimp area, over the PVC and cable.
Unshrouded Threaded Ferrule

- Unshrouded ferrule
Cable
Only the conductor is crimped.
ALUMINUM FERRULE
Approx. Weight
Catalog For Cross-Section
Description
Reference Copper Cables (mm²)
kg lb
ATR17179-2 25 Unshrouded plain 0.07 0.15
RC600-2610 35 Unshrouded plain 0.07 0.15
RC600-2612 70 Unshrouded plain 0.08 0.18 Unshrouded plain aluminium ferrule
ATR17185-2 25 Unshrouded threaded 0.06 0.06
RC600-2602 35 Unshrouded threaded 0.06 0.06
RC600-2604 70 Unshrouded threaded 0.07 0.15 Unshrouded threaded aluminium ferrule

L
ATR13036-2 25 Shrouded plain 0.06 0.13
RC600-2626 35 Shrouded plain 0.06 0.13
RC600-2628 70 Shrouded plain 0.07 0.15 Shrouded plain aluminium ferrule
ATR17184-2 25 Shrouded threaded 0.07 0.15
RC600-2618 35 Shrouded threaded 0.07 0.15
RC600-2620 70 Shrouded threaded 0.08 0.18 Shrouded threaded aluminium ferrule
COPPER FERRULE
Approx. Weight
Catalog For Cross-Section
Description
kg lb
ATR17179-8 25 Unshrouded plain 0.10 0.22
Unshrouded plain copper ferrule RC600-2616 70 Unshrouded plain 0.20 0.44
ATR17185-8 25 Unshrouded threaded 0.12 0.26
Unshrouded threaded copper ferrule RC600-2608 70 Unshrouded threaded 0.15 0.33
ATR13036-8 25 Shrouded plain 0.18 0.40
Shrouded plain copper ferrule RC600-2632 70 Shrouded plain 0.23 0.51
ATR17184-8 25 Shrouded threaded 0.20 0.44
Shrouded threaded copper ferrule RC600-2624 70 Shrouded threaded 0.23 0.51
TIN-PLATED COPPER FERRULE

L Catalog For Cross-Section
Description
Approx. Weight
kg lb
ATR26446-2 25 Tin-plated copper 0.02 0.04
These ferrules are designed to be connected to clamps through screws.
GROUNDING CLUSTER
Grounding cluster bars are designed to simultaneously raise grounding
clamps to conductors in a safe sequence of operations.
They are commonly used in conventional medium voltage overhead lines
interventions.
ATR04694-1
- ATR04694-1
Made of aluminum and galvanized steel rod and universal bronze fitting,
this cluster bar is suitable for installation and removal of spring-loaded
grounding clamps (ATR03653-1).
Approx. Weight : 0.53 kg (1.17 lb)
- ATR04116-1
ATR04116-1
Made of aluminum with bronze connectors, it is suitable for medium size
clamps.
Approx. Weight: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb)
- ATR14442-1
Made of aluminum and galvanized steel rod, this model is suitable for
lifting, installing, and removing ATR13628-1 spring-loaded clamps.
- ATR18867-1
Made of aluminum with bronze connectors, it is suitable for small size
clamps.
Approx. Weight: 0.40 kg (0.88 lb) ATR14442-1
ATR18867-1
SADDLE-TYPE CLUSTER
The five saddle-type cluster bars models allow the formation of an
intermediate ground point in the work structure.
- ATR03318-1
Made of aluminum, it has a belt chain and tightening wheel for perfect
electrical contact with the pole.
ATR03318-1
- ATR06455-1
Made with galvanized steel plate and thumbscrew to adjust the chain to the
pole. Can be connected by plain terminals to grounding cables from 16 to
95 mm².
- ATR14477-1
ATR06455-1 Made with pole-mounting chain device, nylon rod and wing nut for cable
connection.
Approx. weight: 0.43 kg (0.95 lb)
- RC600-0152
Made with aluminum plate and copper shaft. Can be connected by plain
terminals to grounding cables from 16 to 95 mm².
ATR14477-1
RC600-0152
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Clamp Resting Supports
Designed for simultaneous lifting of the clamps to be installed.
The resting supports are suitable for any type of clamp
RG3625
CLAMP RESTING SUPPORTS

Approx.
Catalog Weight
Material RG3626
Reference
kg lb
RG3625 Aluminium 0.13 0.29
RG3626 Aluminium 0.06 0.13
RC600-0080 Bronze 0.15 0.33 RC600-0080
Metallic Reel
- ATR03641-1
Metallic reel, with bronze clamp mounting, to connect the cable to the
grounding rod and can store the cable during transport.
Catalog Reference
Electrical and Mechanical Characteristics
ATR03641-1
Rated Current (A) 200
30 cycles (kA) 8
Short-circuit Current
(lcc)
60 cycles (kA) 5
Maximum Ø 19 mm L
Connection
Minimum Ø 2 mm
Maximum 25 ATR03641-1
Cable Ferrule
(mm²)
Minimum 16
Installation Torque (daN.m) 2.0
ASTM Designation -
Approx. Weight (kg / lb) 1.85 / 4.07
Terminal Block
The blocks allow the connection between the phase clamps and the earth
clamp.
- RG4754-1
An aluminum block, with 04 connectors for grounding cables from 25 to
95 mm².
RG4754-1 Approx. weight 0.51 kg (1.12 lb)
- ATR17574-1
Thermoplastic terminal block for up to 5 tin-plated copper ferrules for
grounding cables up to 50 mm².
ATR17574-1
Special Connector and Adapter

- RC600-1584
Threaded connector for mounting the threaded cable ferrule to the
grounding clamp in special situations where the clamp has a threadless
connection.
RC600-1584
Double Connector
- ATR26555-1
The Double Connector is designed for the mounting of two grounding
cables in a single clamp. A plain terminal must be fixed to one cable and a
RC600-1584
threaded terminal to the other cable.
Typical Application Approx. weight 0.11 kg (0.24 lb)
L ATR26555-1
Grounding Rod
- ATR00137-1
Ø 17 mm x 1.50 m long copper steel rod with bronze thread; detachable
handle for better storage and transport.
- ATR00137-2
Ø 17 mm x 1.00 m long copper steel rod with bronze thread; detachable
handle for better storage and transport.
- ATR08814-1
Made of galvanized steel and hexagonal cross-section, with Ø 19 mm x
1.00 m in length.
- ATR08814-2 ATR00137
Made of galvanized steel and hexagonal cross-section, with Ø 19 mm x
1.20 m in length.
Approx. weight : 3.00 kg (6.61 lb)
STORAGE
Dimensions (m)
Catalog Reference Rod
Lenght Width
ATR16819-1 ATR00137-2 1.15 0.12
ATR16819-2 ATR00137-1 1.57 0.12
ATR16828-1 ATR08814-1 1.07 0.25
ATR16828-2 ATR08814-2 1.27 0.25 ATR08814
All bags has reinforced edges. Ideal for storage and transport of screw
ground rod.
L
STORAGE
Transportation Bags
Due to their small weight, waterproof bags become practical and safe
when transporting the grounding sets. The bags are made in the following
basic models:
- Case Type / Bucket:
Reinforced material, with fiberglass bottom, suitable for cable and
hardware storage.
STORAGE CASE
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Volume
Reference (m³)
A L C
ATR09962-1 290 240 645 0,04

ATR09962-1
STORAGE BUCKET
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Volume
Reference (m³)
A L C
ATR14484-2 420 270 400 0,04
- Bag Type:
ATR14484-2 Made of reinforced material, suitable for cables and fittings.
STORAGE BAG
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Volume
Reference (m³)
A L C
ATR16843-1 250 340 1350 0.11
L ATR16843-2 250 340 1550 0.13
ATR16843-3 180 210 1550 0.06
ATR16843-4 280 240 1100 0.07
ATR16843-5 200 240 900 0.04

ATR16843
ATR16843-6 150 200 800 0.03
ATR16843-7 150 200 550 0.02
TELESCOPIC HOT STICKS
The purpose of the telescopic hot stick (triangular cross-section
RITZGLAS®) is to ensure the safety clearance and isolation required for
interventions in electrical installations.
VTT allows the coupling of tool heads and a series of universal tools for the
most diverse applications, maintaining the required safety clearance and
isolation. Its use does not require stairs or platforms. Tasks can be
performed directly from the ground.
Made of high-visibility color, resin-impregnated fiberglass tube and tip
section, made of RITZGLAS®, it has a foam core and ensures total
insulation, complying with ASTM F1826. It has a universal aluminum head
tool, thumbscrew, reinforced plastic coupling pins, closure, and rubber
terminal.
VTT LIGHT MODEL

Used in situations that requires less mechanical effort such as replace
cutouts tubes and disconnect switches; voltage detector handling and light
bulb replacement.
Either section may be supplied separately if replacement is required.
LIGHT MODEL
Approx.
Ø
Catalog Retracted Length Extended Length Bag Reference Weight
Qty. of Section Base Section
Reference (m) (m) (optional)
(mm)
kg lb
VTT-1/2 2 1.43 2.58 33 SLT-2/3 1.30 2.87
VTT-1/3 3 1.48 3.82 37 SLT-2/3 1.90 4.19
VTT-1/4 4 1.53 5.10 41 SLT-4/5 2.50 5.51
VTT-1/5 5 1.59 6.43 45 SLT-4/5 3.20 7.05
VTT-1/6 6 1.63 7.77 49 SLT-6/7 3.90 8.60

L
VTT-1/7 7 1.68 9.16 52 SLT-6/7 4.70 10.36
VTT-1/8 8 1.74 10.59 56 SLT-8/9 5.70 12.57
VTT-1/9 9 1.77 12.04 61 SLT-8/9 6.90 15.21
VT-1 VT-2 VT-3 VT-4 VT-5 VT-6 VT-7 VT-8 VT-9 BB

(Ø 29.4 mm)
VTT 3HD HEAVY-DUTY MODEL
The VTT-3HD Heavy-Duty model triangular cross-section telescopic hot
stick provides greater mechanical strength with considerable reduced
flexibility, for tasks that require increased stress.
Ø 29,4 mm
Ø 37,1 mm
The VTT may have its third section (VT-3) replaced by a VT-3HD tip
section, turning the VTT assembly into a more mechanically resistant
VTT-3HD.
Section VT-3HD tip when compared

to the light model
HEAVY-DUTY MODEL
Approx.
Ø
(mm)
kg lb
VTT-3HD/4 2 1.51 2.74 41 SLT-4/5 1.80 3.97
VTT-3HD/5 3 1.58 4.07 45 SLT-4/5 2.50 5.51
VTT-3HD/6 4 1.61 5.43 49 SLT-6/7 3.20 7.05
VTT-3HD/7 5 1.66 6.81 52 SLT-6/7 4.00 8.82
VTT-3HD/8 6 1.73 8.24 56 SLT-8/9 5.00 11.02
VTT-3HD/9 7 1.76 9.71 61 SLT-8/9 6.20 13.67
VT-3HD VT-4 VT-5 VT-6 VT-7 VT-8 VT-9 BB

(Ø 37.1 mm)
VTT REINFORCED MODEL WITH SLEEVE
This triangular cross-section telescopic hot stick model has sleeves which
increases mechanical strength, with considerable reduced flexibility for
situations where increased mechanical stress is required.
Fiberglass sleeve
REINFORCED MODEL WITH SLEEVE

Approx.
Ø
(mm)
kg lb
VTT 29537-1/2 2 1.38 2.39 33 SLT-2/3 1.30 2.90
VTT 29537-1/3 3 1.50 3.55 37 SLT-4/5 1.80 4.00
VTT 29537-1/4 4 1.62 4.76 41 SLT-6/7 2.50 5.50
VTT 29537-1/5 5 1.76 6.00 45 SLT-8/9 3.20 7.10
VTT 29537-1/6 6 1.88 7.30 49 VTT17182-G05 4.00 8.90
VTT 29537-1/7 7 2.00 8.63 52 VTT17182-G06 4.90 10.90
VTT 29537-1/8 8 2.11 10.00 56 VTT17182-G07 6.10 13.50
VT-1 VT-2 VT-3 VT-4 VT-5 VT-6 VT-7 VT-8

REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED REINFORCED BB
HEIGHT MEASURING HOT STICK
VTT-1/2 to VTT-1/9 can be supplied with metric graduations, making the
telescopic hot stick a tool for vertical spacing measurements.
There are numerical marks every 10 cm and intermediate marks every
centimeter. To perform a reading, the stick must be supported on the
ground in the vertical position and as the sections are handled, the
operator has access to the reading within visual range.
To purchase this tool simply include the suffix “M” in the telescopic stick
model reference code.
E.g.: VTT-1/7M (9.180 ± 0.01 m length).
The VTT stick modular system is designed so that only the required
number of sections for each service is used. By pressing the locking
buttons, the unnecessary lower sections are released and removed,
making the telescopic stick lighter and more comfortable for tasks.
Either section may be supplied separately if replacement is required..
The take-apart hot stick is usually supplied with a universal head, which (in
addition to being suitable for use of on-load breaker switch maneuvers)
allows the coupling of switch heads and a series of universal tools specially
designed for many different applications such as:
- Switches;
- Fuse-switches operation;
- Fuse cartridge removal and installation;
- Handling of voltage detector;
- Mounting and removal of temporary grounding assemblies and hot line
clamps;
- Life wire installation;
- Tree pruning;
- Network cleaning;
- Light bulb replacement, etc.
The take-apart hot stick is made of RITZGLAS® tube.
In order to make the handling, storage and transportation more practical,
the Sectional Hot Stick is composed of standardized sectional elements,
which are interchangeable, and attached with quick spring-action locking
pins.
Its total length according to each working voltage is obtained from the
number of its sections, which may vary from 1 to 5.
There are two versions depending on diameter:
- standard model: Ø 38 mm handle and middle sections and Ø 32 mm
top section.
- light model: Ø 32 mm handle and middle sections and Ø 25 mm top
section.

Approx.
Catalog Ø Lenght (m)
Section Weight
Reference (mm)
Work Total kg lb
VMR-S Tip 32 1.25 1.45 1.15 2.54
VMR/L-S Light tip 25 1.25 1.45 0.85 1.87 L

VMR-I Middle 38 1.25 1.45 1.20 2.65
VMR/L-I Light middle 32 1.25 1.45 0.80 1.76
VMR-P Handle 38 1.45 1.45 1.10 2.43
VMR/L-P Light handle 32 1.45 1.45 0.70 1.54
VMR-S
VMR-I
VMR-P
Approx.
Number of Sections Max.
Catalog Weight
Length
Reference
(m)
Handle Ø Middle Ø Tip Ø Total kg lb
VMR-15 1 32 - - - - 1 1.25 0.95 2.09
VMR-15/L 1 25 - - - - 1 1.25 0.75 1.65
VMR-30 1 38 - - 1 32 2 2.70 2.25 4.96
VMR-30/L 1 32 - - 1 25 2 2.70 1.55 3.42
VMR-45 1 38 1 38 1 32 3 3.95 3.45 7.61
VMR-45/L 1 32 1 32 1 25 3 3.95 2.35 5.18
VMR-70 1 38 2 38 1 32 4 5.20 4.65 10.25
VMR-70/L 1 32 2 32 1 25 4 5.20 3.15 6.94
VMR-90 1 38 3 38 1 32 5 6.45 5.85 12.90
VMR-90/L 1 32 3 32 1 25 5 6.45 3.95 8.71
For greater operational safety, observe the minimum distances according

to the OSHA table.
STORAGE
The bag has reinforced edges, internal dividers for the proper storage of
hot stick sections, a carrying handle, and an additional pocket for a tool
head.
This bag must be ordered separately, as it is optional.
Color patterns desired by the client may be supplied provided it is
previously agreed upon when requesting the quote.
STORAGE
Internal
Dimensions (m)
Catalog Dividers
Rod
L Reference
Rod VMR Lenght Width
VMR10484-1 ATR00137-1 1 3 1.51 0.38
VMR10484-2 ATR00137-2 1 3 1.51 0.38
VMR10484-3 - - 3 1.51 0.26
VMR16824-1 - - 1 1.51 0.11
VMR16824-2 - - 2 151 0.19
VMR16825-1 - - 4 1.51 0.34
VMR16825-2 ATR00137-2 1 4 1,51 0.42
VMR16826-1 - - 5 1,51 0.42
OPERATIONAL HEADS
Grounding Clamp Heads
The grounding clamp heads are made of aluminum and have a universal
locking system, adaptable to the hot sticks. They are used for grounding
clamp operation through eyescrew locking.
- VMR02579-1
Locking system via adjustable pressure half-ball.
VMR02579-1
- VMR07205-1
It has a galvanized steel rod for alignment and spring-loaded automatic
clamping.
- RM4455-29B
VMR07205-1
The clamp is locked and released by twisting. The clamp is articulated for
easy angled operations.
RM4455-29B
Head with Fall-Protection System

These heads are used for switching, installation, and removal of fuse
holder cartridges without risks of accidental drops.
It has an automatic safety locking device (fall arrest) to ensure the safety of
the electrician.
- FLV11554-1
Hot-dip galvanized steel main body, safety lock and universal bronze alloy
head. FLV11554-1
Approx. Weight: 0,34 kg (0,75 lb)
- FLV13872-1
Main body in coated steel, with plastic and safety lock. Bronze alloy
universal head. L
Approx. Weight: 0,30 kg (0,66 lb)
FLV13872-1
Heads for Operation of Fuse Switches
Universal coupling, standard heads, adaptable to hot sticks.
- VMR16483-1
Aluminum tilted head with circuit-breaker switching shaft and groove for
fuse holder cartridge tongue.
VMR16483-1
- VMR00884-1
Stainless steel head with circuit-breaker switching shaft and groove for
fuse holder cartridge tongue.
- VMR08974-1
VMR00884-1 Bronze head with shaft for circuit breaker switching.
- VMR01479-2
Copper alloy key disconnect head.
VMR08974-1
- VMR11560-1
Stainless steel key disconnect head.
VMR01479-2
HOT LINE CLAMP

- FLV19192-1
VMR11560-1 Nominal current capacity: - 230 A
Mainly used for connecting transformers to medium voltage networks, with
or without the use of a stirrup connector.
DIFFERENTIALS
L - Body and jaw made of cast aluminum and only connector and eyescrew
are made of cast bronze, significantly reducing its weight;
- Connection for shotgun to avoid any movement while lifting and
installation;
- Spring-loaded jaw for easy clamping to the conductor and safe stick
positioning, clamp twisting and mounting;
- Connector output angle for lead wire for easy mounting.
FLV19192-1
GROUP M
LADDERS
Oblong-Shape Side-rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
“U”-Shape Side-rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
“A” Shape Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

GROUP M
LADDERS
Terex Ritz ladders are extremely sturdy and durable. They can be used
indefinitely (as long as the care and conservation procedures in the manual
are observed) and are portable, allowing manual transport.
Their type and size are suitable for the tasks at hand and are in good use
and conservation conditions for safe and highly productive work.
OBLONG-SHAPE SIDE-RAILS
Single and extension ladders, with side-rails (oblong shape) and rungs
(round, non-slip), made of RITZGLAS® tubes. They are finished in
polyurethane painting and equipped with a rubber-coated nylon support
band, movable or fixed shoes with non-slip rubber, meeting category IA of
ANSI A14.5.
Extendable models feature nylon pulleys (for smooth sliding of its parts),
metal rings on base rungs, steel ratchets and plastic-coated side guides.
These ladders are intended for maintenance in de-energized structures, or
up to 15 kV, using the distance work method (using insulated poles).
M
For maintenance up to 15 kV (using the contact method) we recommend
the Double Stringer Ladders with Insulated Ladder Spacer FLV14717-1
(see specific page).
LADDERS 273 TEREX RITZ

SINGLE LADDER
Approx.
Nominal Length Qty. of Weight
Catalog Reference
(m) Rungs
kg lb
ES/PR-8/27-CN-SM 2.78 8 11.00 24.25
ES/PR-8/40-CN-SM 4.03 12 15.52 34.21
ES/PR-8/46-CN-SM 4.65 14 17.78 39.20
ES/PR-8/58-CN-SM 5.84 18 22.30 49.16
Inner width between siderails: 305 mm

Distance between rungs: 305 mm
ES/PR
EXTENSION LADDER
Approx.
Nominal Length (m)
Qty. of Weight
Catalog Reference
Rungs
EE/PR-12/58-CN-SM 3.45 5.86 19 30.00 66.13
EE/PR-12/70-CN-SM 4.05 7.08 23 35.50 78.26
EE/PR-12/82-CN-SM 4.64 8.28 27 39.00 86.00
EE/PR-15/95-CN-SM 5.25 9.52 31 50.00 110.23
EE/PR-15/10-CN-SM 6.28 10.76 35 54.00 119.00
EE/PR-15/11-CN-SM 6.88 11.98 39 61.00 134.48
EE/PR-15/14-CN-SM * 7.80 13.84 45 67.00 147.71
* It must be supported when used through eyebolts on the last rung of the fixed part (base).
Width between side rails: Top Section - 365 mm

M Bottom Section - 305 mm
EE/PR Distance between rungs: 305 mm
TEREX RITZ 274 LADDERS

“U”-SHAPE SIDE-RAILS
Single and extension ladder with U-shape fiberglass side-rails, round
aluminum rungs, non-slip grooves with nylon strap and rubber shoe,
meeting category IA of ANSI A14.5.
Resistant to weather and ultraviolet, it has safety strips in yellow and black.
These ladders are intended for maintenance in de-energized structures or
up to 15 kV by the distance work method (using insulating poles).
SINGLE LADDER
Approx.
Nominal Length Qty. of Weight
Catalog Reference
(m) Rungs
kg lb
ES/PU-29-CN-SB 3.09 9 9.20 20.28
ES/PU-32-CN-SB 3.39 10 10.10 22.27
ES/PU-35-CN-SB 3.69 11 11.00 24.25
ES/PU-38-CN-SB 4.00 12 11.90 26.24
ES/PU-41-CN-SB 4.29 13 12.80 28.22
ES/PU-44-CN-SB 4.59 14 13.70 30.20
ES/PU-47-CN-SB 4.89 15 14.60 32.19
ES/PU-50-CN-SB 5.20 16 15.50 34.17
ES/PU-53-CN-SB 5.49 17 16.40 36.16
ES/PU-56-CN-SB 5.80 18 17.30 38.14
ES/PU-59-CN-SB 6.10 19 18.20 40.12
ES/PU-62-CN-SB 6.40 20 19.10 42.11
ES/PU-65-CN-SB 6.69 21 20.00 44.09
Inner width between siderails: 320 mm

Distance between rungs: 300 mm M
LADDERS 275 TEREX RITZ

EXTENSION LADDER
Approx.
Nominal Length (m)
Qty. of Weight
Catalog Reference
Rungs
EE/PU-35-CN-SB 2,68 3,67 11 16,00 35,27
EE/PU-41-CN-SB 2,96 4,27 13 17,70 39,02
EE/PU-47-CN-SB 3,28 4,87 15 18,50 40,79
EE/PU-53-CN-SB 3,68 5,47 17 21,20 46,74
EE/PU-59-CN-SB 3,99 6,08 19 23,00 50,71
EE/PU-65-CN-SB 4,28 6,68 21 24,80 54,67
EE/PU-71-CN-SB 4,58 7,27 23 26,50 58,42
EE/PU-77-CN-SB 4,87 7,87 25 28,30 62,39
EE/PU-84-CN-SB 5,17 8,46 27 30,00 66,14
EE/PU-90-CN-SB 5,40 9,07 29 31,70 69,89
EE/PU-97-CN-SB 6,09 9,97 33 34,00 74,96
Width between side rails: Top Section - 293 mm

Bottom Section - 320 mm
Distance between rungs: 300 mm

“A” SHAPE LADDERS
Designed for maintenance on de-energized structures. It consists of
hinged segments at the upper end, with opening limiter. It has a top board
for tools and other objects.
For step ladders (heavy category) supplied with Ø 3/8” fiberglass rods at
the center of its rungs, the “/TR” suffix must be added to its reference
code.
Example: EA/PR-21/PD/TR
Double
With rungs on both sides.
“A” SHAPE LADDERS

D D
Approx.
Rated Length (m) Qty. of
Catalog Weight
Rungs on
Reference
each side
A B C D kg lb
EA/PR-12/PD 1.22 0.55 0.93 0.42 x 0.25 03 15.10 32.29
EA/PR-15/PD 1.51 0.58 1.16 0.42 x 0.25 04 18.60 41.00
A
EA/PR-21/PD 2.13 0.62 1.30 0.42 x 0.25 06 25.50 56.22
EA/PR-27/PD 2.73 0.71 1.80 0.42 x 0.25 08 32.70 72.09
EA/PR-34/PD 3.35 0.78 2.12 0.42 x 0.25 10 40.30 88.84
B C
EA/PR-40/PD 3.96 0.85 2.37 0.42 x 0.25 12 48.00 105.82
EA/PR-52/PD 5.17 0.97 3.07 0.42 x 0.25 16 64.30 141.76
Distance between rungs 305 mm
LADDERS 277 TEREX RIZ

M

Terex General-Catalog-2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Terex General-Catalog-2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Terex General-Catalog-2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

History - Terex Ritz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 005

Maintenance and Handling of

Use of Hot Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 007

Reference Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

B Hand Sticks and Universal Tools . . . . 033 H Bare-Hand Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

C Conductor Support Equipment . . . . . 063 I Tool Repair and Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

D Temporary Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

L Grounding Equipment, Telescopic

F Insulating Cover-Up Equipment . . . . . 163 M Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

PRODUCT CATALOG 001 TEREX RITZ

HOT LINE WORKING METHODS 138 a 145 1.09 1.50

INTRODUCTION 003 TEREX RITZ

TEREX RITZ 004 INTRODUCTION

HISTORY 005 TEREX RITZ

Severity means: exposure of tools to excessive load;

TEREX RITZ 006 PRESERVATION AND HANDLING

LIVE LINE TOOLS 007 TEREX RITZ

- Jaws Opening Capacity - Phase-to-phase distance

TEREX RITZ 008 GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY 009 TEREX RITZ

TEREX RITZ 010 GLOSSARY

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Gin Pole for Load Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 016 Snatch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028

Crossarm Gin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 018 Sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 030

Insulated Gin Pole / Cargo Boom . . . . . . 019 Wire Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031

Swivel Boom with Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020 Tool Bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032

Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 024 Tarpaulin for Live Line Tools. . . . . . . . . . . 032

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Hoists with Nylon Straps

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

HOIST WITH NYLON STRAP - 2 TON

CONVERTIBLE STRAP HOISTS (0.75 or 1.5 ton.)

Convertible nylon strap hoist with drive handle and plastic

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

Chain Ratchet Hoists

MANUAL CHAIN HOIST

750E 0.75 7.30 16.09

1500E 1.50 11.50 25.35

3000E 3.00 17.00 37.48

6000E 6.00 23.00 50.70

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

INSULATING CANE FOR HOISTS AND BLOCKS

Rated Work Approx.

RC400-1175 407 2.00 4.40

RC400-2399 32 487 2000 4409 2.40 5.30

RC400-2400 637 3.10 6.80

GIN POLE FOR LOAD LIFTING

LOAD LIFTING TOOLS

In circular concrete poles, it is coupled by conventional metal straps. Due

1° hole: ..................................... 100 daN (220 lb) at base side

2° hole: ..................................... 150 daN (330 lb)

3° hole: ..................................... 200 daN (440 lb)

4° hole: ..................................... 250 daN (550 lb) at upper side.

GINS FOR LOAD LIFTING

Rated Work Length Approx.

With 0.13 m spacer saddle for mounting to pole

With direct mounting system to square pole